75 project manual - facilities.nmsu.edu

193
NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB May 28, 2021 NMSU Project #4103 Desert Peak Project # 206-115 75 PROJECT MANUAL Desert Peak Architects, P.C. 311 N. Main Street Las Cruces, NM 88001 %

Upload: others

Post on 24-Oct-2021

4 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

May 28, 2021NMSU Project #4103

Desert Peak Project # 206-115

7 5 P R O J E C T M A N U A L

Desert Peak Architects, P.C.311 N. Main StreetLas Cruces, NM 88001

%

The technical material and data contained in the Specifications were prepared under the supervision and direction of the undersigned, whose seal as a Professional Architect, licensed in the State of New Mexico, is affixed above.

All questions about the meaning or intent of these documents shall be submitted only to the Architect of Record, stated above, in writing.

ARCHITECT OF RECORD DATE

NMSU O’DONNELL HALL RM. 046 RENOVATIONS

P R O J E C T M A N U A L

February 05, 2020NMSU Project #3650Desert Peak Project # 206-105

Desert Peak Architects, P.C.311 N. Main StreetLas Cruces, NM 88001

Richard Haas, AIA May 28, 2021

05/28/2021

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

000110 – TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 0 – INVITATION TO BID REQUIREMENTS

Per NMSU Invitation to Bid Document

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 Summary

012300 Alternates

012600 Contract Modification Procedures

012900 Payment Procedures

013100 Project Management Coordination

013200 Construction Progress Documentation

013300 Submittal Procedures

014000 Quality Requirements

015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls

016000 Product Requirements

017300 Execution Requirements

017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal

017700 Closeout Procedures

017823 Operation and Maintenance Data

017839 Project Record Documents

DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

024119 Selective Demolition

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

033000 Cast-in-place Concrete

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY

Not Applicable

DIVISION 5 - METALS

Not Applicable

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

061053 Miscillaneous Rough Carpentry

064116 Plastic-Laminate Faced Architectural Cabinets

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

000110 – TABLE OF CONTENTS - 2

075423 Thermoplastic Polyolefin Roofing

079200 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

Not Applicable

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing

092900 Gypsum Board

096513 Resilient Base

096519 Resilient Tile Flooring

099123 Interior Painting

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

101419 Interior Signage

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

116110 Laboratory Fume Hoods and Related Products

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

123500 Specialty Casework

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

Not Applicable

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

Not Applicable

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION

Not Applicable

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

To be provided in 100% Project Manual

DIVISION 23 – MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

To be provided in 100% Project Manual

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

000110 – TABLE OF CONTENTS - 3

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

260500 Common Work Results for Electrical

260503 Equipment Wiring Connections

260533 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems

260534 Outlet Junction and Pull Boxes

262313 Disconnect Switches

262416 Panelboards

262726 Wiring Devices

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

Not Applicable

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

Not Applicable

DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK

Not Applicable

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

Not Applicable

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

Not Applicable

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SUMMARY 01 1000 - 1

SECTION 01 1000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.

2. Use of premises.

3. Owner's occupancy requirements.

4. Specification formats and conventions.

5. Work under other contracts.

6. Site cleaning.

1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: NMSU Genesis-A Water Desalinization Lab

Desert Peak Architects Project No. 206-115

1. Project Location: Genesis Center Building A

a. 3655 Research Road, Las Cruces, NM 88003

B. Owner: New Mexico State University, P.O. Box 30001, Las Cruces, NM.

1. Owner's Representative: Michael Nevarez, Project Manager, New Mexico State

University, P.O. Box 30001, MSC 3545, Las Cruces, NM 88003.

C. Architect: Richard Haas, Desert Peak Architects, P.C. 311 N. Main St., Las Cruces, NM.

D. The Work consists of the following:

1. The Base Bid Work includes:

Demolition:

1. Remove existing carpet tile and base in room 110a and room 110 b. Prep floors for new vct tile

and vinyl base in new work.

2. Saw-cut and remove portions of existing concrete slab and sidewalk as required for new plumb-

ing for new base bid plumbing fixtures. Refer to plumbing.

3. Remove portions of existing gypsum wall board as required for new plumbing for new base bid

plumbing fixtures. Refer to plumbing.

4. Carefully remove portions of existing ceiling tile in room 110b as required for installation of new

vent piping for new base bid plumbing fixture in room 110b. Keep in clean, safe area for re-

installation.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SUMMARY 01 1000 - 2

5. Remove portions of existing gypsum wall board as required for the installation of new electrical

serving fume hood (fh1). Patch/ repair/ paint as required

Architectural:

1. Install portions of new fiber reinforced concrete slab where existing slab was removed for new

work.

2. Provide and install gypsum wall board patches where existing gypsum wall board was removed

for new work. Tape, bed and texture to match existing.

3. Prep existing gypsum wall board in room 110d for new paint. Paint existing and patched gypsum

wall board in room 110d. Paint gypsum wall board patches in room 110b to match existing.

4. Prep existing concrete floor in room 110d to receive new epoxy coating. Install new epoxy floor

coating in room 110d per manufacturer's recommendations.

5. Install new roof flashing as required by new roof penetrations in new work. Refer to plumbing

and mechanical.

6. Install one (1) owner furnished 6' fume hood (fh1) in room 110d. Refer to electrical and mechani-

cal. Fume hood to be tested by contractor per specifications.

7. Install new vct floor tile and vinyl base in rooms 110 a and 110 b

8. Install new room signage to match facilty/nmsu standards

Electrical:

1. Provide power to base bid fume hood (fh1) in room 110d. Provide power to fume hood mounted

receptacle.

2. Provide power to fume hood exhaust equipment.

Mechanical:

1. Provide and install new mechanical ducting and equipment as required for the installation of base

bid fume hood.

Plumbing:

1. Provide and install new stainless steel 2 compartment sink with drain boards (each side) in room

110b. Provide ada pipe guards at all exposed piping.

2. Provide and install new water heater and associated plumbing.

3. Provide and install new floor drain in room 110d and associated plumbing.

4. Provide and install new combination eye wash / shower station and associated plumbing.

5. Provide and install new floor sink to serve 2 compartment sink in room 110a

2. Alternates:

Additive alternate #1: water tank slab and plumbing, electrical, plumbing and concrete slab re-

moval and replacement for owner furnished electrodialysis system and reverse osmosis system.

Demolition:

1. Demolish and remove portions of existing concrete slab and sidewalk as required for the installa-

tion of new plumbing from exterior water tank to proposed location of reverse osmosis system.

Water tank and reverse osmosis system installation by owner (n.i.c.).

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SUMMARY 01 1000 - 3

2. Demolish and remove portions of existing concrete slab as required for the installation of new

floor sink serving owner furnished electrodialysis and reverse osmosis system. Electrodialysis

and reverse osmosis system installation by others (n.i.c.).

Architectural:

1. Provide and install new cast-in-place fiber reinforced concrete slab and sidewalk following instal-

lation of new plumbing.

2. Install 8" thick concrete slab with rebar reinforcement at proposed location of exterior water tank.

(water tank installation by owner (n.i.c.)

3. Provide and install new cast-in-place concrete following installation of new plumbing for floor

sink.

Electrical:

1. Provide and install new breaker box and disconnect for power supply to owner furnished electro-

dialysis and reverse osmosis equipment. Provide circuitry within flexible conduit to owner fur-

nished equipment as required.

2. Provide and install new conduit/wiring for owner furnished electrodialysis and reverse osmosis

equipment.

Plumbing:

1. Provide new plumbing and stub ups from proposed location of water tank to proposed location of

reverse osmosis system and electrodialysis reversal system. Refer to equipment schedule for inlet

size requirements.

2. Install owner furnished water tank on concrete slab. Connect water tank to plumbing stub-ups.

3. Provide and install new 3/4" water supply and shut-off valve to proposed location of owner fur-

nished electrodialysis system.

4. Provide and install new floor sinks and associated plumbing in room 110d to serve owner fur-

nished electrodialysis system and owner furnished reverse osmosis system.

Additive alternate #2: wall demolition, door demolition and infill, metal stud fur down and walk-in

cooler installation

Demolition:

1. Demolish and remove existing metal stud partition between rooms 110a and 110b and associated

electrical and data.

2. Demolish and remove door, door frame and door hardware for room 110b.

3. Remove and re-install portions of existing suspended ceiling as required for walk-in cooler instal-

lation.

Architectural:

1. Provide and install new walk-in cooler in enlarged room 110a. Refrigeration unit to be remote

(roof mounted).

2. Infill opening where door and door frame was removed with new metal stud partition with gyp-

sum wall board (each side). Tape, bed texture and paint to match existing.

3. Provide and install new fur down wall partition where partition was removed.

Plumbing:

1. Provide new condensate drain for walk-in cooler condenser unit and evaporator coil

Electrical:

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SUMMARY 01 1000 - 4

1. Provide new electrical circuit as required for new walk-in cooler condenser unit and evaporator

coil.

Additive alternate #3: vct tile room 110 and room 110c

Demolition:

1. Remove existing carpet and base in rooms 110c and room 110. Prep floors for new vct tile and

vinyl base in new work.

Architectural:

1. Install new vct floor tile and vinyl base in rooms 110 c and 110.

Additvie alternate #4: casework

1. Provide and install new upper cabinetry above existing countertop in room 110d.

2. Provide and install new tall cabinet with glass doors in room 110d.

3 provide and install new upper cabinetry above sink in room 110a.

Additive alternate #5: additional 6' fume hood installation (fh2)

Demolition:

1. Remove portions of existing gypsum wall board as required for the installation of new electrical

serving additional fume hood. Patch/ repair/ paint as required.

Architectural:

1. Install the other owner furnished 6' fume hood (fh2) in room 110d. Refer to electrical and me-

chanical.

Electrical:

1. Provide and install receptacle for additional 6' fume hood. Provide power to fume hood mounted

receptacle.

Mechanical:

1. Provide and install new mechanical ducting and equipment as required for the installation of addi-

tional 6' fume hood.

1.3 USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations. Contractor

to coordinate with Owner for site access and allowable areas for construction operations.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated by Owner. Do

not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SUMMARY 01 1000 - 5

2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and

available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use

these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of

materials and equipment on-site.

C. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout

construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its

occupants during construction period.

D. Schedule of Construction*

1. 06/18/2021– Finalization of CES contract / Notice to Proceed

2. 08/02/2021 – Construction Completion; Certificate of Occupancy

*Schedule for Construction is subject to change.

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES

A. Secure and pay for permits, fees, and licenses necessary for execution of Work as applicable at

time of receipt of bids or as otherwise required in other sections of the Specifications.

B. Secure and pay for utility meters, including impact and development fees. Give required

notices.

C. Comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and other legal requirements of public authorities

which bear on performance of Work.

1.5 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and portions of the building during entire

construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize

conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-

to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used

facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used

facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of

entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SUMMARY 01 1000 - 6

1.7 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the

49-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.

1. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in

the Specifications.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.

These conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract

Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.

Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words

shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where

applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.

Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.

Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for

clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by

others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context,

are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.8 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried

out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the

Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

B. Concurrent Work: Owner will award separate contract(s) for the following construction

operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under

this Contract.

C. Items noted NIC (Not in Contract) will be supplied by Owner and installed by Contractor, when

noted, before Substantial Completion.

1.8 SITE CLEANING

A. See Division 1 Section "Site Cleaning" for these requirements.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SUMMARY 01 1000 - 7

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01100

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SITE CLEANING 01 1710 - 1

SECTION 01 17100 – SITE CLEANING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. General Cleaning Requirements

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Execute cleaning during progress of the work and at completion of the work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Execute daily cleaning to keep the work, the site, and adjacent properties free from accumula-

tions of waste materials, rubbish, and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations.

B. Provide onsite containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish. All waste ma-

terials including containers, food debris and other miscellaneous materials must be disposed of

daily in onsite containers.

C. Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at legal dis-

posal areas away from the site.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. Requirements: At the completion of work and immediately prior to final inspection, clean the en-

tire project as follows:

1. Thoroughly clean, sweep, wash, and polish all work and equipment provided under the Con-

tract, including finishes. Leave the structures and site in a complete and finished condition to the

satisfaction of the Owner.

2. Direct all subcontractors to similarly perform, at the same time, an equivalent thorough clean-

ing of all work and equipment provided under their contracts.

3. Remove all temporary structures and all debris, including dirt, sand, gravel, rubbish and

waste material.

4. Should the CONTRACTOR not remove rubbish or debris or not clean the buildings and site

as specified above, the OWNER reserves the right to have the cleaning done at the expense of the

CONTRACTOR.

B. Employ experienced workers, or professional cleaners, for final cleaning.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SITE CLEANING 01 1710 - 2

C. Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned.

D. In preparation for substantial completion or occupancy, conduct final inspection of sight-exposed

interior and exterior surfaces, and of concealed spaces.

E. Remove grease, dust, dirt, stains, labels, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from sight-

exposed interior and exterior finished surfaces. Polish surfaces so designated to shine finish.

F. Repair, patch, and touch up marred surfaces to specified finish, to match adjacent surfaces.

G. Replace air-handling filters if units were operated during construction.

H. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils, if air-handling units were operated without filters during con-

struction.

I. Vacuum clean all interior spaces, including inside cabinets.

J. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible. Do not drop or throw

materials from heights.

K. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process

will not fall on wet, newly-painted surfaces.

L. Clean interior of all panel cabinets, pull boxes, and other equipment enclosures.

M. Wash and wipe clean all lighting fixtures, lamps, and other electrical equipment

which may have become soiled during installation.

N. Perform touch-up painting.

O. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of the grounds.

P. Remove erection plant, tools, temporary structures and other materials.

Q. Remove and dispose of all water, dirt, rubbish or any other foreign substances.

3.3 FINAL INSPECTION

A. After cleaning is complete the final inspection may be scheduled. The inspection

will be done with the OWNER and Architect.

END OF SECTION

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

ALTERNATES 01 2300- 1

Section 01 2300 – Alternates

PART 1 - General

1.1 Summary

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for bid alternates.

1.2 Definitions

A. alternate: an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the bid form for certain work defined in

the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if owner

decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed

or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the

contract documents.

1. Alternates described in this section are part of the work only if enumerated in the

agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the contract

sum to incorporate alternate into the work. No other adjustments are made to the contract

sum.

1.3 Procedures

A. coordination: revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work

of the alternate into project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar

items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part

of alternate.

B. notification: prior to award of the contract, owner shall confirm if alternates have been

accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the contract.

D. Identify bid lots separately on the schedule of values broken down by category of work.

Schedule: a schedule of alternates is included at the end of this section. Specification sections

contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each

alternate.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

ALTERNATES 01 2300- 2

PART 2 - Products (not used)

PART 3 - Execution

Additive alternate #1: water tank slab and plumbing, electrical, plumbing and concrete slab re-

moval and replacement for owner furnished electrodialysis system and reverse osmosis system.

Demolition:

1. Demolish and remove portions of existing concrete slab and sidewalk as required for the installa-

tion of new plumbing from exterior water tank to proposed location of reverse osmosis system.

Water tank and reverse osmosis system installation by owner (n.i.c.).

2. Demolish and remove portions of existing concrete slab as required for the installation of new

floor sink serving owner furnished electrodialysis and reverse osmosis system. Electrodialysis

and reverse osmosis system installation by others (n.i.c.).

Architectural:

1. Provide and install new cast-in-place fiber reinforced concrete slab and sidewalk following instal-

lation of new plumbing.

2. Install 8" thick concrete slab with rebar reinforcement at proposed location of exterior water tank.

(water tank installation by owner (n.i.c.)

3. Provide and install new cast-in-place concrete following installation of new plumbing for floor

sink.

Electrical:

1. Provide and install new breaker box and disconnect for power supply to owner furnished electro-

dialysis and reverse osmosis equipment. Provide circuitry within flexible conduit to owner fur-

nished equipment as required.

2. Provide and install new conduit/wiring for owner furnished electrodialysis and reverse osmosis

equipment.

Plumbing:

1. Provide new plumbing and stub ups from proposed location of water tank to proposed location of

reverse osmosis system and electrodialysis reversal system. Refer to equipment schedule for inlet

size requirements.

2. Install owner furnished water tank on concrete slab. Connect water tank to plumbing stub-ups.

3. Provide and install new 3/4" water supply and shut-off valve to proposed location of owner fur-

nished electrodialysis system.

4. Provide and install new floor sinks and associated plumbing in room 110d to serve owner fur-

nished electrodialysis system and owner furnished reverse osmosis system.

Additive alternate #2: wall demolition, door demolition and infill, metal stud fur down and walk-in

cooler installation

Demolition:

1. Demolish and remove existing metal stud partition between rooms 110a and 110b and associated

electrical and data.

2. Demolish and remove door, door frame and door hardware for room 110b.

3. Remove and re-install portions of existing suspended ceiling as required for walk-in cooler instal-

lation.

Architectural:

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

ALTERNATES 01 2300- 3

1. Provide and install new walk-in cooler in enlarged room 110a. Refrigeration unit to be remote

(roof mounted).

2. Infill opening where door and door frame was removed with new metal stud partition with gyp-

sum wall board (each side). Tape, bed texture and paint to match existing.

3. Provide and install new fur down wall partition where partition was removed.

Plumbing:

1. Provide new condensate drain for walk-in cooler condenser unit and evaporator coil

Electrical:

1. Provide new electrical circuit as required for new walk-in cooler condenser unit and evaporator

coil.

Additive alternate #3: vct tile room 110 and room 110c

Demolition:

1. Remove existing carpet and base in rooms 110c and room 110. Prep floors for new vct tile and

vinyl base in new work.

Architectural:

1. Install new vct floor tile and vinyl base in rooms 110 c and 110.

Additvie alternate #4: casework

1. Provide and install new upper cabinetry above existing countertop in room 110d.

2. Provide and install new tall cabinet with glass doors in room 110d.

3 provide and install new upper cabinetry above sink in room 110a.

Additive alternate #5: additional 6' fume hood installation (fh2)

Demolition:

1. Remove portions of existing gypsum wall board as required for the installation of new electrical

serving additional fume hood. Patch/ repair/ paint as required.

Architectural:

1. Install the other owner furnished 6' fume hood (fh2) in room 110d. Refer to electrical and me-

chanical.

Electrical:

1. Provide and install receptacle for additional 6' fume hood. Provide power to fume hood mounted

receptacle.

Mechanical:

1. Provide and install new mechanical ducting and equipment as required for the installation of addi-

tional 6' fume hood.

END OF SECTION 01100

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 1

SECTION 01 2600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing

Contract modifications.

1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not

involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time as authorized by the General

Conditions.

1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed

changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If

necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them

instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within 10 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost

adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with

total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data

to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade

discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of

the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and

finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting

an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Limit mark-ups as stipulated in the general conditions.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the

Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the

Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the

proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 2

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total

amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to

substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade

discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,

and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the

Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed

change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Limit mark-ups as stipulated in the general conditions.

C. Stipulated Sum/Price Change Order: Based on Proposal Requests and Contractor's fixed price

quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by the Architect.

1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures

of Owner and Contractor on New Mexico State University Standard Change Order Form.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on

AIA Document G714 as signed by the Owner. Construction Change Directive instructs

Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It

also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the

Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the

Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to

substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01250

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 1

SECTION 01 2900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and

process Applications for Payment.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of

Contractor's Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms

and schedules, including Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets, and

Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than

seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items

for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

a. Project name and location.

b. Name of Architect.

c. Architect's project number.

d. Contractor's name and address.

e. Date of submittal.

2. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project

Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,

where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for

operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and

demonstration and training in the amount of 3 percent of the Contract Sum.

3. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.

4. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated

and stored, but not yet installed.

5. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each

subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

6. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.

Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 2

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual

work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of

Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

7. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next

Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result

in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as

certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial

Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: See General Conditions of the Contract.

C. Payment Application Forms: Use New Mexico State University Standard Form – Application

and Certificate for Payment and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for

Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person

authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete

applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction

Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last

day of construction period covered by application.

E. Transmittal: Submit two copies signed and notarized original copies of each Application for

Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and

similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate

information about application.

F. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or

coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors.

2. Schedule of Values.

3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).

4. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).

5. List of Contractor's staff assignments.

G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial

Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of

the Work claimed as substantially complete, less amounts for close-out documentation.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 3

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a

statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued

previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

H. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting

documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the

following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.

3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.

4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."

5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."

6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."

7. Evidence that claims have been settled.

8. Contractor’s "Letter of Warrantee" for a one-year period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01290

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 1

SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on

Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Project meetings.

2. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).

B. See Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general

installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control

points.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract

Documents.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate

construction operations, included in different Sections, depending on each other for proper

installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before

or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure

maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to

ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and

repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures

required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees

at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their

Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 2

and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not

limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.

4. Delivery and processing of submittals.

5. Progress meetings.

6. Preinstallation conferences.

7. Project closeout activities.

8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

9. Project closeout activities.

1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: The Architect will coordinate, and schedule meetings and conferences at Project site,

unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Contractor will determine, and inform participants and individuals whose

presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. The Architect will notify the

Owner of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: The Architect will prepare and distribute the meeting agenda to all invited

attendees.

3. Minutes: The Architect will record significant discussions and agreements achieved and

distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner, within five days

of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: The Owner will schedule a preconstruction conference before

starting construction, no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the

conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review

responsibilities and personnel assignments.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;

Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned

parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar

with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the

following:

a. Tentative construction schedule.

b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.

c. Designation of key personnel and their duties.

d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.

e. Procedures for RFIs.

f. Procedures for testing and inspecting.

g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.

h. Distribution of the Contract Documents.

i. Submittal procedures.

j. Preparation of Record Documents.

k. Use of the premises and existing building.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 3

l. Work restrictions.

m. Owner's occupancy requirements.

n. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.

o. Construction waste management and recycling.

p. Parking availability.

q. Office, work, and storage areas.

r. Equipment deliveries and priorities.

s. First aid.

t. Security.

u. Progress cleaning.

v. Working hours.

3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: The Contractor will conduct a pre-installation conference at

Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and

installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect

of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the

particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. The Contract Documents.

b. Options.

c. Related RFIs.

d. Related Change Orders.

e. Purchases.

f. Deliveries.

g. Submittals.

h. Review of mockups.

i. Possible conflicts.

j. Compatibility problems.

k. Time schedules.

l. Weather limitations.

m. Manufacturer's written recommendations.

n. Warranty requirements.

o. Compatibility of materials.

p. Acceptability of substrates.

q. Temporary facilities and controls.

r. Space and access limitations.

s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

t. Testing and inspecting requirements.

u. Installation procedures.

v. Coordination with other work.

w. Required performance results.

x. Protection of adjacent work.

y. Protection of construction and personnel.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 4

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including

required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who

should have been present.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.

Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the

Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: The Contractor will conduct progress meetings at regular intervals.

Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in

planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these

meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized

to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. The Contractor shall provide an Agenda for each progress meeting

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as

appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.

Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,

in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction

behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to

do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and

subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.

2) Sequence of operations.

3) Status of submittals.

4) Deliveries.

5) Off-site fabrication.

6) Access.

7) Site utilization.

8) Temporary facilities and controls.

9) Work hours.

10) Hazards and risks.

11) Progress cleaning.

12) Quality and work standards.

13) Status of correction of deficient items.

14) Field observations.

15) RFIs.

16) Status of proposal requests.

17) Pending changes.

18) Status of Change Orders.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 5

19) Pending claims and disputes.

20) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: The Contractor shall record the meeting minutes.

5. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who

should have been present.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress

meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue

revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

1.5 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents,

and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the

form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor

will be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's

work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and

the following:

1. Project name.

2. Date.

3. Name of Contractor.

4. Name of Architect.

5. RFI number, numbered sequentially.

6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.

7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.

9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

10. Contractor's signature.

11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

C. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it.

Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.

c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents.

d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.

e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 6

f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case

Architect's time for response will start again.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the

Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to

Division 1 Section "Contract Modifications."

D. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response

to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor

disagrees with response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.

Include the following:

1. Project name.

2. Name and address of Contractor.

3. Name and address of Architect.

4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.

5. RFI description.

6. Date the RFI was submitted.

7. Date Architect's response was received.

8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01310

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200 - 1

SECTION 01 3200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress

of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Submittals Schedule.

3. Daily construction reports.

4. Field condition reports.

5. Prevailing wage reports.

6. As-builts.

B. See Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.

1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of

construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of

subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required

schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties

involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule

them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required

by construction schedule. Include time required for review, re-submittal, ordering,

manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.

1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and

Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction

Schedule.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200 - 2

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of

Substantial Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an

early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal

element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long

lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities

in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,

approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1

Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in

Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.

3. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 30 days for startup and testing.

4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for

Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures

necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

C. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but

not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.

D. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its

submission, complete a time-impact analysis to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change

on the overall project schedule.

2.3 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following

information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site.

2. Equipment at Project site.

3. Material deliveries.

4. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.

5. Accidents.

6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.

7. Meter readings and similar recordings.

8. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.

9. Services connected and disconnected.

10. Equipment or system tests and startups.

B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions

and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for

interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with

recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect

actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule before each regularly scheduled

progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have

been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each

such meeting.

2. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,

testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know

schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the

same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned

portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.

3.2 AS-BUILTS

A. Maintain on site a set of Drawings to document as-built conditions, and keep up-to-date with all

revisions to the work and deviations from the plans. As-built documents shall be reviewed by

the Architect upon the completion of the work.

END OF SECTION 01320

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 1

SECTION 01 3300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop

Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and

reports.

C. See Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports.

D. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.

E. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data.

F. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and

maintenance manuals.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive

action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so

processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for

coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring

coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress

Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of

related construction activities.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 2

C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as

follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of

the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in

advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time

if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor

when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner

as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.

2. Provide a space on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval

markings.

3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name.

b. Date.

c. Name and address of Architect.

d. Name and address of Contractor.

e. Name and address of subcontractor.

f. Name and address of supplier.

g. Name of manufacturer.

h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

l. Other necessary identification.

E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract

Documents on submittals.

F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless

Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal

may serve as final submittal.

G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and

handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals,

without review, received from sources other than Contractor.

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision.

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "APPROVED AS NOTED."

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 3

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of

construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "APPROVED" taken by

Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and

type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are

not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.

c. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

f. Printed performance curves.

g. Operational range diagrams.

h. Compliance with specified referenced standards.

i. Testing by recognized testing agency.

4. Number of Copies: Submit Product Data digitally, unless otherwise indicated. Architect

will return a copy of the submittal indicating required action, if any. Mark up and retain

one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base

Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless

submittal of Architect's CAD Drawings is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the

following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions.

b. Identification of products.

c. Fabrication and installation drawings.

d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.

e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and

control wiring.

f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 4

g. Templates and patterns.

h. Schedules.

i. Notation of coordination requirements.

j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.

l. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

m. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed

wiring.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop

Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 24 by

36 inches (610 by 915 mm).

3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal or a digital copy

of each submittal. Architect will return one copy if hard copies are received.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between

submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together

in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.

c. Sample source.

d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-

control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be

used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or

sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color,

pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from

manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

E. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction

Progress Documentation."

F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment

Procedures."

G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment

Procedures."

H. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each

portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a

special design.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 5

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal or one digital copy, unless

otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be

signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that

entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section

"Quality Requirements."

B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project

Management and Coordination."

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section

"Construction Progress Documentation."

D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience

of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names

and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel

comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure

Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include

names of firms and personnel certified.

F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is

authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying

that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of

manufacturing experience where required.

H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with

requirements in the Contract Documents.

K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by

manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on

evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or

on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 6

L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect

for Project.

M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation

of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed

before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate

preparation needed for adhesion.

O. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during

installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with

requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and

normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in

Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,

performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.

Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.

Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for

calculations. Include page numbers.

R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents

manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a

product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of

manufacturer.

S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized

service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.

2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.

3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements.

T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of

insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of

coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

U. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to

Architect.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for

compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with

approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name

and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date

of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,

and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and

will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or

modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp

and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:

1. Final Unrestricted Release: When submittals are marked "Approved", that part of the

work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or

corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final

acceptance will depend upon that compliance.

2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked "Approved as noted", that

part of the work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with

notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents;

final acceptance will depend on that compliance.

3. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittals are marked "Revise and Resubmit", do not

proceed with that part of the work covered by the submittal, including purchasing,

fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance

with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different

action mark.

a. Do not permit submittals marked "Revise and Resubmit" to be used at the Project

Site, or elsewhere where work is in progress.

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, will return

it if it does not comply with requirements, or return it marked "Action not required". Architect

will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned

without review.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 8

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.

END OF SECTION 01330

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 1

SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and

quality control to be coordinated and paid by the Contractor.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the

Contract Document requirements.

1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-

assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document

requirements.

2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required

by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of

this Section.

C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed

construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after

execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and

completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract

enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project

before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or

compliance with specified criteria.

D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by a testing agency qualified to

conduct product testing and acceptable to the Owner, to establish product performance and

compliance with industry standards.

E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e.,

plant, mill, factory, or shop.

F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation

of the Work and for completed Work.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 2

G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,

including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

I. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a

minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with

special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction.

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish

different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the

most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but

apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be

the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the

minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.

To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as

appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision

before proceeding.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels

required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as

well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient

production capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing

engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed

for installations of the system, assembly, or products that are similar to those indicated for this

Project in material, design, and extent.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 3

F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency with the experience and capability to

conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with

additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities

having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

G. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of

manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this

Project.

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless

otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities

having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities

having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing

agency to perform these quality-control services.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires

testing or inspecting will be performed.

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a

certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract

Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,

when they so direct.

B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal

Procedures."

C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for

construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of

duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the

Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests

are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and

inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar

quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve

or accept any portion of the Work.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 4

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and

similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify

agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the

following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency.

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance

and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and

replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas

with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.

END OF SECTION 01400

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 1

SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and

protection facilities.

B. See Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.

C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements

for products in those Sections.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is

complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all

openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum.

Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not

limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering

and without payment of use charges. Contractor may provide connections and extensions of

services as required for construction operations. Restore sources to as-found or specified

conditions at Contract Closeout.

C. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use

without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of

services as required for construction operations. Restore sources to as-found or specified

conditions at Contract Closeout.

D. Telephone Service: Provide telephone service for use by supervisory personnel. Monthly cost

of service shall be paid by the Contractor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for

construction personnel.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 2

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary

electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each

temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume

responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its

use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned

responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Chain-Link Fencing: Panelized 6 foot high commercial grade chain link fence. Equip with

vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks.

B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous

Carpentry."

C. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by

maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with

ASTM C 36/C 36M.

D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool;

with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature

controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate

materials and equipment for construction operations.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by

locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,

self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 3

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating

units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for

temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille

in system and remove at end of construction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference

with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the

Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities

are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be

interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for

construction.

D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of

construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,

operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

E. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities

for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from

adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a

harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction

activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction

from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 4

completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to

produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

G. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as

long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.

H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination

for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements

without operating entire system.

I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all

construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.

J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, i.e.

facsimile machine, or computer with access to electronic mail in field office.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas

adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location

as permanent roads and paved areas. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within

construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations.

1. Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and

paved areas.

2. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, re-

grading, proof-rolling, compacting, and testing.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

E. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs as

indicated on Drawings. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking

entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle

waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning

requirements.

G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 5

H. Temporary Elevator Use: Refer to Division 14 Sections for temporary use of new elevators.

I. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders

are not adequate.

J. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering

of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that

minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable

effects.

B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and

discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,

according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Stormwater Control: Comply with storm water pollution prevention plan. Provide barriers in

and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater

from heavy rains.

D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line

of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root

systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.

E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and

harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control

procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial

Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using

environmentally safe materials.

F. Site Enclosure Fence: When excavation begins, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a

manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined

sufficient to accommodate construction operations.

2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized

personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys.

G. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially

completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,

vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

H. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 6

I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in

progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar

activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate

temporary enclosures.

J. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt

migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side,

and fire-retardant plywood on construction operations side.

2. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas.

3. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks.

4. Protect air-handling equipment.

5. Weather strip openings.

6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

K. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types

needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with

NFPA 241.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.

2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel

at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be

followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning

sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.

Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and

abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and

protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has

ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than

Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may

have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,

clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.

Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 7

2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during

construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1

Section "Closeout Procedures."

END OF SECTION 01500

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 1

SECTION 01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for

use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on

products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.

C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and

installations specified to be warranted.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or

taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"

"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or

model number or other designation shown, or listed in manufacturer's published product

literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or

facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless

explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not

considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal

process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities

related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,

appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and

accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other

designation to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service

performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of

evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product

or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and

title and Drawing numbers and titles.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 2

1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts of the Work and to construction that will be necessary to accommodate

proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of

the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as

performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and

requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and

installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.

f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.

g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated.

h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall

Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided

within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's

letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.

k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.

l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated

results.

2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution.

B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify

product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section

number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product

request.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1

Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 3

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more

products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously

selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,

deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that

are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other

losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original

sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for

handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to

ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.

5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment.

6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on

product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract

Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual

manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to

Owner.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 4

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract

Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide

more rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and

identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and

properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a

written document using appropriate form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular

requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,

that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items

needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used

successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with

requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make

selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications

establish "salient characteristics" of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the

named product that complies with requirements.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,

provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

3. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and

manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies

with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for

consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a

product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies

with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for

consideration of an unnamed product.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 5

5. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional

requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the

specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"

Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.

6. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of

manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other

named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions,

and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in

Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the

other named manufacturers.

7. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established

Sample, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect's decision will be

final on whether a proposed product matches.

a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other

specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"

Article for proposal of product.

8. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected

from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that

complies with other specified requirements.

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of

colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern,

density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium

items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,

patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or

texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium

items.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after

commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at

discretion of Architect.

B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following

conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return

requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy

conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner

must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect

for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and

similar considerations.

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results.

4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 6

5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.

6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction.

7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.

9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the

following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will

return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract

Documents, whether consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the

indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the

Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,

durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.

5. Samples, if requested.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01600

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 - 1

SECTION 01 7000 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.

2. Field engineering and surveying.

3. General installation of products.

4. Progress cleaning.

5. Starting and adjusting.

6. Protection of installed construction.

7. Correction of the Work.

B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final Project Record Documents,

recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and

verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction

affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.

B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate

and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting

the Work.

1. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public

utilities serving Project site.

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or

Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with

existing finishes or primers.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 - 2

2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of

connections before equipment and fixture installation.

3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are

to be installed.

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or

relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances

located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to

other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before

fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the

Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for

clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include

a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the

Contract Documents.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on

Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are

discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill

and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building

foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and

electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.

Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and

levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and

duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log

available for reference by Architect.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 - 3

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference

points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control

points during construction operations.

B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,

referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having

jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record

Documents.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and

elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in

applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.

Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be

factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that

adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated

requirements.

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component

securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at

heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and

items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver

such items to Project site in time for installation.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 - 4

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,

arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered

hazardous.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate

progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce

requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and

debris.

2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the

temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.

Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for

proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials

specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning

materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure

freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing

waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining

materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from

damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure

operability without damaging effects.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7000 - 5

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction

completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious

exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for

proper operation.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification

requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage

or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.

Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition."

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up

with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired

without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components

that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.

END OF SECTION 01700

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419 - 1

SECTION 01 7419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste.

2. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.

B. Contractor will provide solid waste and recyclable containers, and bare the associated cost of

disposal.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting

from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes

packaging.

B. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,

recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

C. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in

preparation for reuse.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Waste Management Training: Conduct training at Project site.

1.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT

A. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition, site-clearing, and

construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for

estimates.

B. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled,

or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of

each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation

procedures.

1. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled

materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.

2. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include

name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419 - 2

3. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating

recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location

on Project site where materials separation will be located.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 IMPLEMENTATION

A. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible

for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management. Coordinator shall be

present at Project site full time for duration of Project.

B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management

procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.

1. Educate entities when they first begin work on-site on waste management effort. Review

procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure

minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and

used facilities.

1. Designate specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be

salvaged, recycled, or reused.

2. Comply with Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust

and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate

recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical.

1. Contractor will provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable

and solid waste until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and

unacceptable materials at each container and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials

if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place,

grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of

remaining trees.

4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419 - 3

3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry

location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.

3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from

Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood

pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements

for recycling wood.

B. Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees on-site.

C. Wood Materials:

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.

2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

D. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location. Grind and

arrange for delivery to City of Las Cruces Recycling Center.

3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

B. Disposal: Contractor will transport waste and recycled materials off property and legally

dispose of them.

END OF SECTION 01 7419

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 - 1

SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Videotaping of systems specific training.

3. Warranties.

4. Final cleaning.

B. See Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment

for Substantial and Final Completion.

C. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data.

D. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.

E. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for

the Work in those Sections.

F. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for systems specific training requirements for the Work in

those Sections.

1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial

Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on

the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final

certifications and similar documents.

4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar

releases.

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,

damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by

Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's

personnel of changeover in security provisions.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 - 2

8. Complete startup testing of systems.

9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, construction tools, and

similar elements.

11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.

12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. Provide videotaped training sessions for NMSU employee use for systems

specific training.

13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of

request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled

requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection

or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by

Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections

as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final

Completion.

1.3 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final

Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment

Procedures."

2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be

completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy

of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for

acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements.

4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,

Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.

Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor

of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections

as incomplete is completed or corrected.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 - 3

1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area

affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction

including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and

proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

1.5 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of

the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is

indicated.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the

Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,

thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch

(215-by-280-mm) paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark

tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or

installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone

number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title

"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or

fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially

hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply

with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution

regulations.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 - 4

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each

surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and

maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification

of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,

including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other

foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other

foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured

surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from

Project site.

e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural

weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original

condition.

f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,

plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.

h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;

shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.

i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.

Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish

mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

j. Remove labels that are not permanent.

k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or

that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and

electrical nameplates.

l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and

similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and

other foreign substances.

m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.

n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains

resulting from water exposure.

o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and

defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply

with requirements for new fixtures.

q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 - 5

C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or

excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous

materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of

lawfully.

END OF SECTION 01770

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 1

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and

maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Emergency manuals.

2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.

3. Maintenance instructions for the care and maintenance of products, materials, finishes,

systems and equipment.

B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual

requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manual: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at 75% project completion. Architect

will return copy with comments within 15 days after initial submittal.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 1 hard

copy and one digital copy of each corrected manual within 10 days of receipt of

Architect's comments.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each

system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.

Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents, and manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.

2. Name and address of Project.

3. Name and address of Owner.

4. Date of submittal.

5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.

6. Name and address of Architect.

7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 2

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed

to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project

Manual.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by

system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,

equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to

accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with

clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside

covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of

contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each

tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of

equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification

Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic

software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and

use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled

envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in

manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,

and drawing locations.

2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for type of emergency, emergency

instructions, and emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include

instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component for

fire, gas leak, water leak, power failure, water outage, and equipment failure.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,

and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for

notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include instructions on stopping, shutdown instructions for each type

of emergency, operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits, and

required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 3

2.3 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in

individual Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards, operating

procedures, operating logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license requirements.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.

4. Equipment function.

5. Operating characteristics.

6. Limiting conditions.

7. Performance curves.

8. Engineering data and tests.

9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and control procedures; stopping and normal

shutdown instructions; routine, normal, seasonal, and weekend operating instructions; and

required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as

installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for

identification.

2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.

Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and

sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and

arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and

telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference

Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.

2. Manufacturer's name.

3. Color, pattern, and texture.

4. Material and chemical composition.

5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and inspection

procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, schedule for cleaning and

maintenance, and repair instructions.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 4

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and

related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include

source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,

maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service

contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,

identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,

list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,

and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation

including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for maintenance, nomenclature of

parts and components, and recommended spare parts for each component part or piece of

equipment:

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide,

disassembly instructions, and adjusting instructions, that detail essential maintenance

procedures:

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of

required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine

maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with

parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local

sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and

telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and

conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures

for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies

indicated.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 5

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care

and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance

data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment

not part of a system.

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include

only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each

product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a

tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.

Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the

relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and

flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to

ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance

manuals.

END OF SECTION 01782

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record

Documents prior to certification for final payment, and within 30 days of Substantial

Completion, including the following:

1. Record Drawings (As-built).

2. Record Specifications.

3. Record Product Data.

B. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements.

C. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of

the Work in those Sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: Near Substantial Completion of Work, submit one set of

marked-up Record Prints completed from original Contract Documents that are

acceptable to the Architect.

b. Final Submittal: Architect will prepare the final Record Drawings submittal to the

Owner.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and

contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings

and Shop Drawings marked prominently as "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS".

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies

from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 2

whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the

marked-up Record Prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be

difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup

before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish

between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

3. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order

numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Drawings: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion,

review marked-up Record Prints with Architect. All final and revised as-built drawings and

close-out documents are to be delivered to the Architect with delivery of the Substantial

Completion document. The Architect will prepare a full set of corrected CAD Drawings of the

Contract Drawings.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and

equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to

provide a record of selections made.

4. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where

applicable.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation

varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that

cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in

manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where

applicable.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 3

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous

record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file

miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project

Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as

they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the

field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project

Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and

in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to

Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

END OF SECTION 01781

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119 - 1

SECTION 02 4119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building

2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless

indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent

damage, and deliver to Owner.

C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and

that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and

reinstalled.

1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.

Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as

far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding

with selective demolition.

D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them

against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

F. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered within the

work area. Contractor to stop work and inform the Owner/Architect immediately upon

discovery of hazardous materials within the work area.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119 - 2

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged

during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of

selective demolition required.

B. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended

function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.

Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and

protect them against damage.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in

Division 1 Section "Summary."

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,

disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems

serving areas to be selectively demolished where indicated in the drawings.

1. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain

continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from equipment to be selectively demolished, if any,

according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119 - 3

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal

operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other

adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 1 Section

"Temporary Facilities and Controls."

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new

construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of

governing regulations and as follows:

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.

Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and

chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to

remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring

existing finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At

concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden

space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression

devices during flame-cutting operations.

4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management."

B. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.

3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.

4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.

5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be salvaged, or otherwise indicated to

remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of

them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 4119 - 4

3. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste

Management."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective

demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition

operations began.

END OF SECTION 02 4119

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. SUMMARY

1. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design,

placement procedures, and finishes.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1

Specification Sections.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and standards,

except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:

1. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."

2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice."

B. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of work.

Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed work, shall be done at Contractor's

expense.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM MATERIALS

A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other

acceptable panel-type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish

in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on

drawings.

B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material.

Earth forms are allowed for footings.

C. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds with a maximum VOC

of 350 mg/l that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair

subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2

D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties, designed

to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete upon removal. Provide units that will

leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to exposed surface.

1. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1-inch diameter in concrete

surface.

2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel.

C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.

D. Alkali-resistant glass fiber:

1. Glass fibers shall conform to ASTM C1666

2. Fiber content in spray-up mixtures shall be 5% by weight with a tolerance of -1/2% and +1%

E. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting,

and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire-bar-type supports

complying with CRSI specifications.

1. For slabs-on-grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material

will not support chair legs.

2. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms,

provide supports with legs that are plastic protected (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel

protected (CRSI, Class 2).

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.

1. Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.

B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F.

C. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single

source for exposed concrete.

1. For exterior exposed surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing spalling-

causing deleterious substances.

2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 but that special tests or actual service have

shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable

to Architect.

D. Water: Drinkable.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3

E. Admixtures, General: Provide admixtures for concrete that contain not more than 0.1 percent

chloride ions.

F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

required admixtures.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

(1) "Air-Tite," Cormix.

(2) "Air-Mix" or "Perma-Air," Euclid Chemical Co.

(3) "Darex AEA" or "Daravair," W.R. Grace & Co.

(4) "MB-VR" or "Micro-Air," Master Builders, Inc.

(5) "Sealtight AEA," W.R. Meadows, Inc.

(6) "Sika AER," Sika Corp.

G. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

(1) "Chemtard," ChemMasters Corp.

(2) "PSI N," Cormix.

(3) "Eucon WR-75," Euclid Chemical Co.

(4) "WRDA," W.R. Grace & Co.

(5) "Pozzolith Normal" or "Polyheed," Master Builders, Inc.

(6) "Prokrete-N," Prokrete Industries.

(7) "Plastocrete 161," Sika Corp.

H. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

(1) "Super P," Anti-Hydro Co., Inc.

(2) "PSI Super," Cormix.

(3) "Eucon 37," Euclid Chemical Co.

(4) "WRDA 19" or "Daracem," W.R. Grace & Co.

(5) "Rheobuild," Master Builders, Inc.

(6) "PSP," Prokrete Industries.

(7) "Sikament 300," Sika Corp.

I. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

(1) "Q-Set," Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co.

(2) "Gilco Accelerator," Cormix.

(3) "Accelguard 80," Euclid Chemical Co.

(4) "Daraset," W.R. Grace & Co.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4

(5) "Hydraset-Free," W.R. Meadows, Inc.

(6) "Pozzutec 20," Master Builders, Inc.

J. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

(1) "PSI-R Plus," Cormix.

(2) "Eucon Retarder 75," Euclid Chemical Co.

(3) "Daratard-17," W.R. Grace & Co.

(4) "Evapre," W.R. Meadows, Inc.

(5) "Pozzolith R," Master Builders, Inc.

(6) "Protard," Prokrete Industries.

(7) "Plastiment," Sika Corporation.

K. Water: Potable, complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M, except free of wash water from mixer washout

operations.

2.4 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq.

yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.

1. Waterproof paper.

2. Polyethylene film.

3. Polyethylene-coated burlap.

C. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid-type membrane forming curing compound

complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. Moisture loss not more than 0.055 gr./sq. cm.

when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

(1) "A-H 3 Way Sealer," Anti-Hydro Co., Inc.

(2) "Spartan-Cote," The Burke Co.

(3) "Conspec #1," Conspec Marketing & Mfg. Co.

(4) "Hardtop," Cormix.

(5) "Day-Chem Cure and Seal," Dayton Superior Corp.

(6) "Eucocure," Euclid Chemical Co.

(7) "Horn Clear Seal," A.C. Horn, Inc.

(8) "L&M Cure," L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

(9) "Masterkure," Master Builders, Inc.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5

(10) "CS-309," W.R. Meadows, Inc.

(11) "LR-151," Prokrete Industries.

(12) "Kure-N-Seal," Sonneborn-Rexnord.

(13) "Stontop CS2," Stonhard, Inc.

D. Water-Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

(1) "Highseal," Conspec Marketing and Mfg. Co.

(2) "Safe Cure and Seal," Dayton Superior Corp.

(3) "Aqua-Cure," Euclid Chemical Co.

(4) "Dress & Seal #18WB," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

(5) "Masterseal W," Master Builders, Inc.

(6) "Intex," W.R. Meadows, Inc.

(7) "Sika Membrane," Sika Corp.

2. Verify compatibility with floor finishes for interior concrete slabs.

E. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab

surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

(1) "Aquafilm," Ardex, Inc.

(2) "Eucobar," Euclid Chemical Co.

(3) "E-Con," L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

(4) "Confilm," Master Builders, Inc.

(5) "Vocomp-20," W.R. Meadows, Inc.

2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field

experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch method used, use an independent testing

facility acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing

facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing.

1. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 20 percent of cement content by weight.

B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days

prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been

reviewed by Architect.

C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties, as indicated on

drawings and schedules:

1. 4000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.46 maximum

D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when

characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6

accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be

submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in work.

2.6 ADMIXTURES

A. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (Superplasticizer) in

concrete as required for placement and workability.

B. Use nonchloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50

deg F (10 deg C).

C. Use high-range water-reducing admixture (HRWR) in pumped concrete, concrete for industrial

slabs, architectural concrete, parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and

concrete with water/cement ratios below 0.50.

D. Use air-entraining admixture in all exterior concrete. Add air-entraining admixture at

manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content

with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent within following limits:

(1) 6.0 percent 3/4-inch to 1-1/2-inch max. aggregate.

E. Use admixtures for water reduction and set control in strict compliance with manufacturer's

directions.

F. Color pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer’s written

instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mock-up.

G. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement as

follows:

1. Ramps, slabs, and sloping surfaces: Not more than 3 inches.

2. Reinforced foundation systems: Not less than 1 inch and not more than 3 inches.

3. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (Superplasticizer): Not more than 8 inches after

addition of HRWR to site-verified 2-inch to 3-inch slump concrete.

4. Other concrete: Not more than 4 inches.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.

1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing

and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg

F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7

A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.

3.2 FORMS

A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral, static

and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct

formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and

position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances complying with ACI 347.

B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment,

location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets,

sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds,

bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in work. Use selected materials to

obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of

cement paste.

C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide

crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top

forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf

wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.

D. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for

inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary

openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in

forms at inconspicuous locations.

E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips

fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.

F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of

other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing

such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.

G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete.

Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms

and bracing before concrete placement as required to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper

alignment.

3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing

Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as herein

specified.

1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder during reinforcement placement and concreting

operations.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or

destroy bond with concrete.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support

reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect.

D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space,

and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement

operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full

mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in

either direction.

3.4 JOINTS

A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated or, if not indicated, locate

so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect.

B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls and slabs and between

walls and footings. Accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs.

C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across

construction joints.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other

work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams,

instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto.

B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain

required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed

strips using strike-off templates or compacting- type screeds.

3.6 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES

A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form-coating

compound before reinforcement is placed.

B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-

place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with

manufacturer's instructions.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel,

and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work;

cooperate with other trades in setting such work.

B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting,

and Placing Concrete," and as herein specified.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9

C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on

concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If

a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit

concrete to avoid segregation at its final location.

D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24

inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several

layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.

1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-

spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete

in accordance with ACI 309.

2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine.

Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer.

Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion

limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment

of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix.

E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within

limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed.

1. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around

reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies

to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning

finishing operations.

3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement.

F. Cold-Weather Placing: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work

from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low

temperatures.

G. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat

water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50

deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.

1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on

frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical

accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.

H. Hot-Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and

strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified.

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below

90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 10

temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water.

Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel

temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in

concrete.

3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before concrete is placed.

4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity,

or other adverse placing conditions, when acceptable to Architect.

3.8 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work or

concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form-

facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other

projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.

B. Smooth Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with a coating

material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as

waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or other similar system. This is an as-cast

concrete surface obtained with selected form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and

symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins and

other projections completely removed and smoothed.

C. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Provide grout-cleaned finish to scheduled concrete surfaces that have

received smooth form finish treatment.

1. Combine one part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand by volume, and a 50:50 mixture

of acrylic or styrene butadiene- based bonding admixture and water to consistency of thick

paint. Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement, amounts determined by

trial patches, so that final color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces.

2. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces, apply grout to coat surfaces, and fill small holes. Remove

excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least

36 hours after rubbing.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces

occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent

formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent

unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES

A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other

finishes as hereinafter specified; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic

waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo; and as otherwise indicated.

1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready

for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 11

disappeared, when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven

floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is

small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to tolerances of Ff 18 -

Fl 15. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains.

Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

B. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view and slab

surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or other thin film

finish coating system.

1. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final

troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface.

Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform

in texture and appearance, and with surface leveled to tolerances of Ff 20 - Fl 17. Grind

smooth surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system.

C. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-set mortar,

apply trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface by fine

brooming.

D. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and

ramps, and elsewhere as indicated

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-

bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.

3.10 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and

during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and

troweling.

B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and

finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.

C. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing compound, by moist curing, by

moisture-retaining cover curing, and by combinations thereof, as herein specified.

D. Provide moisture curing by following methods.

1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.

2. Use continuous water-fog spray.

3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water,

and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces

and edges, with 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

E. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows:

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 12

1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest

practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape

or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material

and waterproof tape.

F. Provide curing and sealing compound to exposed interior slabs and to exterior slabs, walks, and

curbs as follows:

1. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing

operations are complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared).

Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with

manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial

application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish

materials applied directly to concrete.

G. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported

slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until

forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as

applicable.

H. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat

surfaces, by application of appropriate curing method.

I. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture-

retaining cover, unless otherwise directed.

3.11 REMOVAL OF FORMS

A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns,

and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F

(10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be

damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are

maintained.

B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural

elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained at least 75 percent

of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of

in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members.

C. Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical

supports have been arranged to permit removal of form-facing material without loosening or

disturbing shores and supports.

3.12 REUSE OF FORMS

A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise

damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-

coating compound as specified for new formwork.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 13

B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove

fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not

use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect.

3.13 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades,

unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure

concrete as herein specified, to blend with in- place construction. Provide other miscellaneous

concrete filling shown or required to complete work.

B. Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry lintels and bond beams where

indicated on drawings and as scheduled. Maintain accurate location of reinforcing steel during

concrete placement.

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after

removal of forms, when acceptable to Architect.

B. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods

and bolts, down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts

perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush- coat the

area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding compound

has dried.

C. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that,

when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous

location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in

place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

D. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects

cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture

irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on

surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie

holes, fill with dry-pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

E. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect the durability of

concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete.

F. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness

and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high

areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and

smoothness by using a template having required slope.

G. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects that affect durability of concrete. Surface

defects, as such, include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to

reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts,

honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.

H. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 14

I. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching compound. Finish repaired areas

to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when

acceptable to Architect.

J. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by

cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean,

square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen

concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix patching

concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place,

compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent

concrete.

K. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch in diameter by dry-pack method.

Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles.

Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Mix dry-pack, consisting of one

part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough

water as required for handling and placing. Place dry-pack before bonding compound has dried.

Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area

continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.

L. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using

specified epoxy adhesive and mortar.

M. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect.

3.15 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. General: The Contractor will employ a testing laboratory to perform tests and to submit test reports.

B. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the following,

as directed by Architect.

C. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.

1. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of

concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.

2. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete;

ASTM C 231 pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each

type of air-entrained concrete.

3. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below,

when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and each time a set of compression test specimens is

made.

4. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each

compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-

cured test specimens except when field-cure test specimens are required.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 15

5. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yds.

plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. more than the first 25 cu. yds. of each concrete class

placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and

one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.

6. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of

concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if

fewer than 5 are used.

7. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yds., Architect may waive

strength test if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.

8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured

cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and

curing the in-place concrete.

9. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three

consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength, and no

individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500

psi.

D. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, Ready-Mix Producer, and

Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the

project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing

service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength

at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of

break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be

permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.

F. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test

results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the

structure, as directed by Architect. Testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of

concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

Contractor shall pay for such tests when unacceptable concrete is verified.

END OF SECTION 03 3000

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Wood blocking and nailers.

2. Wood furring.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is

indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency

certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the

ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal unless otherwise

indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior

construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not

in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no

arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use

material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board

of Review.

D. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 2

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar

members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in

contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior

masonry or concrete walls.

4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or

unexcavated areas.

5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread

index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant

progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame

front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during

the test.

1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-

retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to

accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where

indicated.

2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less

when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where

exterior type is not indicated.

3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to

ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to

ASTM D 6841.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

C. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing

agency.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING

A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: [Construction or No. 2] [Construction, Stud, or No. 3]

[Standard, Stud, or No. 3] grade of any species.

B. Other Framing: Construction or No. 2 grade of species:

1. Southern pine or mixed southern pine; SPIB.

2. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.

3. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 3

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other

construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.

2. Nailers.

3. Furring.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.

C. Utility Shelving: Lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content of eastern white pine,

Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Premium or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA,

NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

D. Concealed Boards: 15 percent maximum moisture content of [any of the following] [the

following] species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.

2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA.

3. Northern species, [No. 2 Common grade; NLGA.

4. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in

this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,

or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating

complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, length as

recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying

with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.

B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl

rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded

polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame

Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit

carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, and similar

supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities

requiring backing panels.

D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated

lumber.

F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying

with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),

"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-

Family Dwellings.

3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite

protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.

Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

END OF SECTION 061053

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 1

SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced

architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet

installation.

2. Panel, finish and hardware products for plastic laminate faced architectural cabinets.

3. Solid Surface Countertop Materials

4. Miscellaneous Materials

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products and cabinet hardware and

accessories.

B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale

details, attachment devices, and other components.

D. Samples:

1. Plastic laminates, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.

2. Thermoset decorative panels, for each color, pattern, and surface finish.

3. Solid surface countertop finish

4. Drawer pulls, slides and hinges

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.

1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet

work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative

humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork

Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction,

finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide [labels] [and] [certificates] from [AWI] [WI] certification program indicating

that woodwork[, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.

B. Grade: [Custom].

C. Type of Construction: [Frameless]

D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: [Reveal overlay]

E. Reveal Dimension: [1/4 inch (13 mm)]

F. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as

required by woodwork quality standard.

1. Formica Corporation

2. Wilsonart LLC

3. Lab Designs Architectural Laminates

G. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Horizontal Surfaces: [Grade HGS]

2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP.

3. Vertical Surfaces: [Grade VGS].

4. Pattern Direction: [Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels]

H. Materials for Semi exposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: [High-pressure decorative laminate,

NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS]

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: [Solid-hardwood lumber]

3. Drawer Bottoms: [Hardwood plywood]

I. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and

drawers unless located directly under tops.

J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures

of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations.

2. Match Architect's sample.

3. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range.

4. Basis of Design: 4845-60 Twilight Zephyr as manufactured by Wilsonart.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 3

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard

for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 8 to 13 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of

referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless

otherwise indicated.

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.

2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.

3. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay].

4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.

5. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with

thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with

requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated,

use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing

identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

1. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of

qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that

will be concealed from view after installation.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less

when tested according to ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant progressive combustion

when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more

than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Kiln dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 and

15 percent, respectively.

2.4 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural

cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive

Specification)."

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, [135] degrees of

opening

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 4

C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.

D. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid [metal] [5 inches (127 mm) long, 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm)

deep, and 5/16 inch (8 mm) in diameter].

E. Catches: [Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141] [Push-in magnetic catches,

BHMA A156.9, B03131]

F. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: [BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081]

G. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; [metal]

H. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.

1. Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted[ and extending under bottom edge of drawer];

[full-extension] [partial-extension] type; [zinc-plated steel] [epoxy-coated steel] with

polymer rollers.

2. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; [full-extension] type; zinc-plated-

steel ball-bearing slides.

3. For drawers not more than 3 inches (75 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm)

wide, provide [Grade 1].

4. For drawers more than 3 inches (75 mm) high but not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high

and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide [Grade 1]

5. For drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide,

provide [Grade 1HD-100]

6. For computer keyboard shelves, provide [Grade 1]

7. For trash bins not more than 20 inches (500 mm) high and 16 inches (400 mm) wide,

provide [Grade 1HD-100]

I. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

J. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

K. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

L. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with

BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to

less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.

Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-

metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.

C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 5

2.6 SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS

A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with

ANSI SS1.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of

the following

a. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company.

b. Avonite Surfaces.

c. Formica Corporation.

d. LG Chemical, Ltd.

e. Meganite Inc.

f. Samsung Chemical USA, Inc.

g. Swan Corporation (The).

h. Transolid, Inc.

i. Wilsonart International.

.

2. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. Basis of

Design: Antarctica as manufactured by Dupont Corian.

B. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:

1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top

2. Backsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner

3. Endsplash: Straight, slightly eased at corner.

C. Countertops: 1/2-inch thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same

material over ¾” MDF substrate.

D. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch thick, solid surface material integrated into countertop.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent

possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for

shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for

scribing, trimming, and fitting.

B. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work,

and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to

produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and

burrs.

C. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and in

GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation

areas.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install

level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

C. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at

cuts.

D. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with

countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails[ or finishing

screws] for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are

accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide

unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a

straight line.

2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16

inches o.c. with [No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch

penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips] [No. 10 wafer-head

sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish]

[toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish].

END OF SECTION 064116

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 1

SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system base flashing penetrations

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA

Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For roofing penetration flashing to include in maintenance manuals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing

system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive

manufacturer's special warranty.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Contractor agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail

in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty: Contractor’s warranty for a period of 1 year from the date of substantial

completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TPO MEMBRANE MATERIALS

B. Membrane Fasteners: Type and size as required by roof membrane manufacturer for roofing

system and warranty to be provided; use only fasteners approved by roof membrane manufac-

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 2

turer. Coordinate with Owner for information on existing roof membrane manufacturer.

D. Formable Flashing: Non-reinforced, flexible, heat weldable sheet, composed of thermoplastic

polyolefin polymer and ethylene propylene rubber.

1. Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) plus/minus 10 percent.

2. Tensile Strength: 1550 psi (10.7 MPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM

D 638 after heat aging.

3. Elongation at Break: 650 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638

after heat aging.

4. Tearing Strength: 12 lbf (53 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1004

after heat aging.

5. Color: White.

6. Acceptable Product: Formable flashing as approved by existing roofing membrane manu-

facturer.

E. Tape Flashing: 5-1/2 inch (140 mm) nominal wide TPO membrane laminated to cured rub-

ber polymer seaming tape, overall thickness 0.065 inch (1.6 mm) nominal

F. Bonding Adhesive: Neoprene and SBR rubber blend, formulated for compatibility with the

membrane other substrate materials, including masonry, wood, and insulation facings

G. Pourable Sealer: Two-part polyurethane, two-color for reliable mixing

H. Seam Plates: Steel with barbs and Galvalume coating; corrosion-resistance complying with

FM 4470.

J. Cut Edge Sealant: Synthetic rubber-based, for use where membrane reinforcement is ex-

posed

K. General Purpose Sealant: EPDM-based, one part, white general purpose sealant

L. Molded Flashing Accessories: Unreinforced TPO membrane pre-molded to suit a variety of

flashing details, including pipe boots, inside corners, outside corners, etc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from

entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is

forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

C. Install roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain weathertightness

of transition

3.2 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Flashing at Penetrations: Flash all penetrations passing through the membrane; make flashing

seals directly to the penetration.

1. Pipes, Round Supports, and Similar Items: Flash with specified pre-molded pipe

flashings wherever practical; otherwise use specified self-curing elastomeric flashing

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 3

2. Pipe Clusters and Unusual Shaped Penetrations: Provide penetration pocket at least 2

inches (50 mm) deep, with at least 1 inch (25 mm) clearance from penetration, sloped to

shed water.

3. Structural Steel Tubing: If corner radii are greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) and longest side

of tube does not exceed 12 inches (305 mm), flash as for pipes; otherwise, provide a

standard curb with flashing.

4. Flexible and Moving Penetrations: Provide weathertight gooseneck set in sealant and

secured to deck, flashed as recommended by manufacturer.

3.3 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When

remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and

damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair

substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration

at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures

recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION 075423

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SEALANTS AND CAULKING 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - SEALANTS AND CAULKING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Throughout the Work, seal and caulk joints where shown on the Drawings and elsewhere as

required to provide a positive barrier against passage of moisture and air.

B. Section Includes:

1. Sure-Weld TPO Cut-Edge Sealant

2. Silicone joint sealants.

3. Urethane joint sealants.

4. Mildew-resistant joint sealants.

5. Latex joint sealants.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.

B. Samples: For each kind and color of joint sealant required.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.

3. Joint-sealant formulation.

Joint-sealant color.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the

necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the

methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to

Project joint substrates. Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint

Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in

ASTM C 1521.

B.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SEALANTS AND CAULKING 079200 - 2

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Do not retain at the job site any material which has exceeded the shelf life recommended by the

manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Written installer’s warranty agreeing to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with

performance requirements for two (2) years, and twenty (25) year guarantee from sealant

manufacturer agreeing to provide replacement sealants for those that fail.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL

A. Provide the following sealants, or equal, where called for on the Drawings or otherwise required

for a complete and proper installation.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SURE WELD TPO CUT EDGE SEALANT

A. Sure-Weld TPO Cut-Edge Sealant.

1. Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces.

2. Control and expansion joints in parapet caps.

3. Base flashing/counterflashing at roof mounted equipment and skylight curbs.

4. Application: Exterior and interior horizontal joints subject to vehicular and pedestrian

traffic.

5. Cut edges of TPO Membrane.

2.3 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS ASTM C 920

A. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent

movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.

b. Pecora Corporation; 890.

c. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrum 1

2.4 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and

minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SEALANTS AND CAULKING 079200 - 3

a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II.

b. Polymeric Systems, Inc; PSI-270.

c. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240.

B. Urethane, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50

percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT.

a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II.

b. Polymeric Systems, Inc; PSI-270.

c. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240.

C. Urethane, S, NS, 25, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent

movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, Uses T and NT.

a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II.

b. Polymeric Systems, Inc; PSI-270.

c. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240.

D. Urethane, M, NS, 50, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent

movement capability nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS,

Class 50, Use NT.

a. Polymeric Systems, Inc; PSI-270.

b. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240 FC.

E. Urethane, M, NS, 50, T, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent

movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M,

Grade NS, Class 50, Uses T and NT.

a. Polymeric Systems, Inc; PSI-270.

b. Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240 FC.

2.5 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide

to prevent mold and mildew growth.

B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component,

nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing

silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

C. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.

a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.

b. Bostik, Inc; Chem-Calk 600.

c. May National Associates, Inc; Bondaflex 600.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SEALANTS AND CAULKING 079200 - 4

d. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.

e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc; SM 8200.

2. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834

2.6 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant

complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through

perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative

assemblies according to ASTM E 90

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR.

b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.7 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C closed-cell material with a surface skin

Type O (open-cell material, Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin)] [ or any of

the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint

application indicated], and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise

contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of

sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate

tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants

and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces

adjacent to joints.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SEALANTS AND CAULKING 079200 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct

conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until

unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and that joint measurements and surface

conditions are as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which may affect adhesion of sealant.

C. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not

stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion.

D. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as

indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.

E. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with

adjoining surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Clean joints and install sealant in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges.

C. Tool joints concave.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1193 and joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation

instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position

required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint

widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants

and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time

backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SEALANTS AND CAULKING 079200 - 6

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing

begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated. Use tooling

agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or

adjacent surfaces.

1. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

b. Tile control and expansion joints.

c. Joints between different materials listed above.

d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.

b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units.

c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.

d. Joints in dimension stone cladding.

e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of

colors.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring.

c. Control and expansion joints in brick flooring.

d. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.

e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SEALANTS AND CAULKING 079200 - 7

3. Joint Sealant: Silicone

4. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of

colors.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

b. Tile control and expansion joints.

c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry, concrete, walls and

partitions.

d. Joints on underside of plant-precast structural concrete beams and planks.

e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Latex

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of

colors.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces

not subject to significant movement.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors

windows and elevator entrances.

c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of

colors.

F. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal

nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.

c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of

colors.

G. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Aluminum thresholds.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SEALANTS AND CAULKING 079200 - 8

b. Sill plates.

c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based.

3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of

colors.

END OF SECTION 079200

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.

2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-

load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in

assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical

to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to

ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless

otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 25 Gauge 0.0269 inch.

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide[one of] the following:

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2

1. Clip System: Clips designed for use in head-of-wall deflection conditions that provide a

positive attachment of studs to runners while allowing 2-inch minimum vertical

movement.

2. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in

thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner

and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide

lateral bracing.

3. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- deep

flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer

runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

4. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes

applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in

thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch diameter wire,

or double strand of 0.048-inch diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or

strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater

than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488/E 488M

conducted by a qualified testing agency.

2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,

fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated

according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by

testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.

D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch.

E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538

inch and minimum 1/2-inch wide flanges.

1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power,

and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply

to framing installation.

2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063

that apply to framing installation.

3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that

apply to framing installation.

4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply

to framing installation.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely

fastened.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,

grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing

members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior

walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural

supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to

terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above

ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to

produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished

assemblies.

2. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required

for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to

match framing required above door heads.

3. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 4

E. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than

1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than

spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by

building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling

plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting

horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger

spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension

system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of

trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within

performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,

eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,

and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching

to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for

structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or

otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.

6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that

extend through forms.

7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.

8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet

measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between

parallel members that will receive finishes.

END OF SECTION 092216

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Interior gypsum board.

2. Texture finishes.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For each texture finish indicated on same backing indicated for Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an

independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical

to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to

ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agent.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and

that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following

a. American Gypsum Co.

b. BPB America Inc.

c. G-P Gypsum.

d. Lafarge North America Inc.

e. National Gypsum Company.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2

f. PABCO Gypsum.

g. TempleInland.

h. USG Corporation

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

E. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant

core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch Type X.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.4 SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Board, Type C: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to have increased fire-

resistive capability.

1. Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-

faced galvanized-steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.

b. Bullnose bead.

c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.

f. Expansion (control) joint.

g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead.

b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.

c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and

removable strip covering slot opening.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.

3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.

4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible

with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,

use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use setting-type taping drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping

compound.

D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:

1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type,

sandable topping compound.

2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer.

E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel

manufacturer.

2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and

manufacturer's written instructions.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum

panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from

0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by

panel manufacturer.

D. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)

produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag

wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

E. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant

complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through

perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative

assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072600 "Vapor Retarders."

2.8 TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.

B. Polystyrene Aggregate Ceiling Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, polystyrene aggregate finish

with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of not more than 25 when tested according to

ASTM E 84.

1. Texture: match existing texture

C. Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray

application.

1. Texture: match existing texture

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS

A. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold

damaged.

B. Comply with ASTM C 840.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim

where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces

with acoustical sealant.

D. For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for

panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Prefill open joints[, rounded or beveled edges,] and damaged surface areas.

F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not

intended to receive tape.

G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to

ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 2: None

3. Level 3: None.

4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior

Painting."

5. Level 5: None

H. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for

use as exposed soffit board.

I. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces

receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.

B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a

uniform texture matching existing free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or

of application patterns.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 6

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,

construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

END OF SECTION 092900

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Resilient base and accessories

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12

inches long.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. FloorScore Compliance: Rubber base shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standards.

2.2 THERMOSET- RUBBER BASE

A. Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufactures offering

products that may incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following.

1. Tarkett

2. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

3. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.

4. Flexco, Inc.

5. Forbo Flooring, Inc.

6. Johnsonite.

7. Roppe Corporation, USA

B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid,

homogeneous).

1. Style and Location:

a. 4” cove base at all locations noted on interior room finish schedule.

C. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

D. Height: 4 inches.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.

H. Colors: As selected by NMSU Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or

blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product

manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient

products and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Stair-Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient stair-tread

manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.

D. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient stair-

tread manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of

resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to

ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.

2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by

manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed

with installation only after substrate passes test.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to

manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3

lb. of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.

Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative

humidity level.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching

compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are

to be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient

products.

3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other

permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of

adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in

continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient

base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

H. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns

not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns

not less than 3 inches in length.

a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.

3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Stair Accessories:

1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.

2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 4

3. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint

between units.

C. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates

throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would

otherwise be exposed.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.

B. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 096513

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1

SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Vinyl Enhanced Tile

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns,

doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

1. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.

D. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Certification of compliance: Letter of compliance signed by manufacturer certifying

materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria, and physical

requirements.

2. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance data.

B. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has

specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.

1. Engage installer certified as a certified Resilient Installer (standard installations)

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with

ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by Tarkett, but not less than 55

deg F (13 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C).

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 2

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been

completed.

B. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by Tarkett, but not less than 65

deg F (18 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient products during

the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.

2. During installation.

3. 48 hours after installation.

C. Maintain the ambient relative humidity between 40% and 60% during installation.

D. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by

Tarkett, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 85 deg F (29 deg C).

E. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before

fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements

and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.

1.7 WARANTY

A. Project Warranty: Refer to "Conditions of the Contract" for project warranty provisions.

B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty

document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to,

and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents.

C. Warranty Period: Ten (10) year limited warranty commencing on Date of Substantial

Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Vinyl Enhanced Tiles (VET) designed for durability and commercial interiors

A. Approved Manufacturers:

Tarkett North America Phone: (800) 899-8916

30000 Aurora Rd.

Solon, OH 44139

Web: www.tarkettna.com

B. Basis of Design Product: Color Essence VET as manufactured by Tarkett North America

C. Tile Standard: ASTM F1066, specify: [Type II (Through Pattern)]

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 3

D. Thickness/Wearlayer: 0.125 inch (3.17 mm)

E. Colors and Patterns: [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors]

1. Color #1 basis of design: Hub Cap CE 105

2. Color #2 basis of design: Lighthouse CE 123

F. Sizes specify: [12 by 12 inches (30.5 by 30.5 cm)]

G. Test data:

1. Heat Stability (ASTM F1514): ΔE < 8

2. Size/Squareness (ASTM F2055): Passes

3. Deflection (ASTM F1304): Passes

4. Chemical Resistance (ASTM F925): Passes

5. Static Load Limit (ASTM F970): 400 psi, ≤ 0.005 inches (Modified load)

6. Residual Indentation (ASTM F1914): Passes

7. Slip Resistance (ASTM D2047): ≥ 0.5 SCOF

8. Dimensional Stability (ASTM F2199): Passes

9. Impact Resistance (ASTM F1265): Passes

10. Flamability (ASTM E648 Critical Radiant Flux): Class 1 (≥ 0.45 W/cm2)

11. Smoke Density (ASTM E662): ≤ 450

12. Limited Commercial Warranty: 10 years

2.3 INSTALLATION

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based or blended

hydraulic-cement-based formulation.

B. Adhesives: As recommended by Tarkett to meet site condition

Resilient Vinyl Floor Tile

Tarkett 100 Clear Thin Spread Adhesive

Tarkett 975 Two-Part Urethane Adhesive

Tarkett 901 SpraySmart Adhesive

INSTALLATION MATERIALS

C. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based or blended

hydraulic-cement-based formulation.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

H. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum

moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the work.

I. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in

other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign

deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 4

J. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

K. Prepare substrates according to Tarkett written instructions to ensure proper adhesion of

Resilient Flooring.

1. Prepare concrete substrates in accordance with ASTM F 710.

a. Concrete floors must be free of dust, solvent, paint, wax, oil, grease, residual

adhesive, adhesive removers, film-forming curing compounds, silicate penetrating

curing compounds, sealing, hardening or parting compounds, alkaline salts,

excessive carbonation or laitence, mold, mildew, and other foreign materials that

may affect dissipation rate of moisture from the concrete, discoloration or adhesive

bonding.

b. Mechanically remove contamination on the substrate that may cause damage to the

resilient flooring material. Permanent and non-permanent markers, pens, crayons,

paint, etc., must not be used to write on the back of the flooring material or used to

mark the substrate as they could bleed through and stain the flooring material.

c. Perform moisture testing as recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with

installation only after substrates have been tested and meet the minimum

requirements from the manufacturer in accordance with ASTM F1869 Standard

Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor

Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride or ASTM F2170 Standard Test Method for

Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes.

d. A pH test for alkalinity must be conducted on the concrete floor prior to

installation with results conforming to manufacturer requirements. If the test

results are not within the acceptable range, then installation must not proceed until

the problem has been corrected.

2. Wood subfloors must have a minimum 18" (45.7 cm) of cross-ventilated space beneath

the bottom of the joist.

a. The floor must be rigid, free of movement.

b. Single wood and tongue and groove subfloors should be covered with ¼" (6.4 mm)

or ½" (12.7 mm) APA approved underlayment plywood.

1) Use ¼" (6.4 mm) thick underlayment panels for boards with a face width of

3" (76 mm) or less.

2) Use ½" (12.7 mm) thick underlayment panels for boards with a face width

wider than 3" (76 mm).

c. Do not install over OSB (Oriented Strand Board), particle board, chipboard, lauan

or composite type underlayments.

L. Fill cracks, holes, depressions and irregularities in the substrate with good quality Portland

cement based underlayment leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to

produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

M. Floor covering shall not be installed over expansion joints.

N. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to

be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed

at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 5

O. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before

installation.

3.3 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING INSTALLATION

P. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient tile flooring.

Q. Vinyl Composition Flooring:

1. Install with Tarkett adhesive specified for the site conditions and follow adhesive label

for proper use.

2. Follow Tarkett’s recommendation for tile orientation.

3. Open enough cartons of floor tiles to cover each area, and mix tile to ensure shade

variations do not occur within any one area.

4. Roll the flooring in both directions using a 100 pound three-section roller.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

R. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient

products.

S. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.

3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

T. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction

operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

1. No traffic for 24 hours after installation.

2. No heavy traffic, rolling loads, or furniture placement for 48 hours after installation.

U. Wait 48 hours after installation before performing initial cleaning.

V. A regular maintenance program must be started after the initial cleaning.

END OF SECTION 096519

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RESINOUS FLOORING AND COATING 096723 - 1

SECTION 09 67 23 RESINOUS FLOORING AND COATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Epoxy Flooring and Coatings.

1. Slip-retardant epoxy coating. (Posi-Tred O)

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section (03 30 00) - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Standard Test Method International (ASTM):

1. ASTM C307 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical-Resistant

Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings.

2. ASTM C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal

Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and

Polymer Concretes.

3. ASTM C579 - Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-

Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes.

4. ASTM C580 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity

of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes.

5. ASTM D1308 - Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear

and Pigmented Organic Finishes.

6. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness.

7. ASDTM D4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using

Portable Adhesion Testers.

8. ASTM F1679 - Standard Test Method for Using a Variable Incidence Tribometer

(VIT).

9. ASTM F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate

of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.

10. ASTM F2170 - Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete

Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes1

11. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric

Materials to Fungi.

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. ACI 503.1 - Standard Specification for Bonding Hardened Concrete, Steel, Wood,

Brick, and Other Materials to Hardened Concrete with a Multi-Component Epoxy

Adhesive.

2. ACI 503.R - Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete.

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI A1264 - American National Standard for the Provision of Slip Resistance on

Walking/Working Surfaces.

D. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI):

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RESINOUS FLOORING AND COATING 096723 - 2

1. ICRI - 310.25 Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation.

E. National fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1. NFPA 56A - Standard for the Use of Inhalation Anesthetics.

F. Society of Protective Coatings (SSPC):

1. SSPC - Monitoring and Controlling Ambient Condition During Coating operations.

2. SSPC TU-10 - Procedures For Applying Thick Film Coatings and Surfacings Over

Concrete Floors.

3. SSPC TR-5 - Design, Installation, and Maintenance of Protective Polymer Flooring

Systems for Concrete.

4. SSPC TECHNOLOGY GUIDE NO. 10 - Guide to Specifying Coatings Conforming

to Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Requirements.

5. SSPC-SP 13/NACE No. 6 - Surface Preparation of Concrete.

G. United States Defense Standard (MIL):

1. MIL-D-3134 - Deck Covering Materials.

2. MIL-PRF-3135 - Performance Specification: Deck Covering Underlay Materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements.

B. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used.

2. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

C. Verification Samples: For products specified, two samples, 6 inches (150 mm) square

representing actual product, color, texture and patterns.

D. Shop Drawings: Details of materials, construction and finish. Include relationship with

adjacent construction.

E. Contractor Certification: Manufacturer letter certifying installer is properly trained in

application of materials being installed, and is acceptable to materials manufacturer.

F. Guarantee Certification: Letter from the primary materials manufacture certifying that the

manufacturer will issue a joint installer manufacturer guarantee with the installing

contractor.

G. Certification: CA Department of Public Health 01350 Method for Testing and Evaluation of

Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions From Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in

this section with ISO certification and a minimum ten years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Specializes in installations to that required for Project with five

years' experience. Engage an SSPC Concrete Coatings Inspector certified to perform

inspections on Project. Installer will be acceptable to materials manufacturer.

C. Source Limitations: Each product type from single manufacturer ensuring uniformity.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RESINOUS FLOORING AND COATING 096723 - 3

D. Mock-Up: Construct a mock-up with actual materials in sufficient time for Architect's

review and to not delay construction progress. Locate mock-up as acceptable to Architect

and provide temporary foundations and support.

1. Intent of mock-up is to demonstrate quality of workmanship and visual appearance.

2. If mock-up is not acceptable, rebuild mock-up until satisfactory results are achieved.

3. Retain mock-up during construction as standard for comparison with completed work.

4. Do not alter or remove mock-up until work is completed or removal is authorized.

1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Pre-installation Meetings: Coordinate work of this Section, with related work.

1. Attendance: Subcontractor performing work and manufacturers and fabricators

involved, or affected by, installation. Coordinate installations that precede or follow.

2. Agenda: Review progress of construction activities and preparations for the particular

activity under consideration. Agenda shall include schedule, drain and floor sink

interface, detailing, door thresholds, responsibilities, critical path items, and

approvals.

3. Record, agreements, and disagreements, and corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes to each party present and others requiring information.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers with unbroken seals and bearing

manufacturer's labels with date of manufacture and production lot number. Store and handle

in strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations.

B. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperature, and construction operations.

C. When practical stage materials in area of Work 48 hours prior to beginning of Work.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, surface temperature, material

temperature and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer during installation

and cure. Do not install under conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.

B. Restrict access to Work area except installing contractor and site supervision during

preparation, installation and cure period.

C. Lighting: Permanent lighting shall be in place prior to flooring installation.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard limited warranty for the specified term.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer:

1. Address: Crossfield Products Corporation, which is located at: 3000 E. Harcourt

Street; Rancho Dominguez, CA 90221; ASD Phone: 310-886-9100; Fax: 310-886-

9119; Email: [email protected]; Web: www.dexotex.com.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RESINOUS FLOORING AND COATING 096723 - 4

2. Address: Crossfield Products Corporation, which is located at: 140 Valley Road;

Roselle Park, NJ 07204; ASD Phone: 908-245-2800; Fax: 908-245-0659; Email:

[email protected]; Web: www.dexotex.com.

3. Address: Crossfield Products Corporation, which is located at: 128 Industrial Drive,

Cibolo, TX 78108; ASD Phone: 210-888-0449; Email: [email protected]; Web:

www.dexotex.com.

B. Requests for substitutions must be submitted two weeks prior to bid date. Substitution

request received after will not be considered. Request will be considered per Section 01 60

00 - Product Requirements.

2.2 EPOXY FLOORING AND COATINGS

A. Slip Retardant Epoxy Coating:

1. Basis of Design: Dex-O-Tex Posi-Tred O by Crossfield Products.

2. Physical Properties:

a. Co-efficient of Friction (MIL-PRF-3134e):

1) Medium Profile, Static Friction: Saltwater Solution on Surface: 1.03, Oil

on Surface: 0.75.

b. Chemical Resistance, Spot-Test Open 24 Hours (ASTM D1308):

1) Citric Acid, 70 Percent: No Effect.

2) Hydrochloric Acid, 10 Percent: No Effect.

3) Sulfuric Acid, 50 Percent: No Effect.

4) Sodium Hydroxide, 5 Percent: No Effect.

5) Lactic Acid: Discoloration.

6) Beef and Bacon Fat: No Effect.

7) Hydraulic Fluid: No Effect.

8) Urine: No Effect.

c. Resistance to Immersion, SAE 10 Oil, Detergent Solution (MIL-PRF-3134,

Paragraph 4.6.11): No softening, loss of adhesion, or other form of

deterioration.

d. Fire Resistance (ASTM E162): Flame Spread Index 0, Smoke Deposited 2mg.

3. Colors: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

4. Medium Profile, Texture: 32 mils (0.81 mm).

5. Vapor Control Primer Membrane: Type recommended by flooring manufacturer for

type of service and floor condition indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin preparation and installation until substrates are properly constructed and

inspected complying with ACI 311.4R-05 Guide for Concrete Inspection. The General

Contractor is to correct non-conformities if defects are discovered. Repair per ACI 546.R-04.

Turn over work in broom clean condition free of debris and foreign matter.

B. If substrate preparation is responsibility of another contractor, inspect per ACI 311.4R-05

Guide for Concrete Inspection by a certified SSPC CCI inspector. If preparation is not

satisfactory or if surface is contaminated, notify Architect in writing. Do not proceed with

the installation before the deficiencies have been satisfactorily corrected.

C. Perform moisture testing per ASTM F1869 and F2170. Document results per this

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RESINOUS FLOORING AND COATING 096723 - 5

specification. If MVER or RH exceeds manufactures recommend level for specified product.

Apply vapor control primer before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to commencement of the preparation and installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving best result for

substrate under project conditions.

C. Concrete Surfaces: Shot-blast, or diamond grind per SSPC SP-13/NACE 6. Remove material

to provide a sound surface free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, bond inhibiting curing

compounds or form release agents. Remove grease, oil, and other penetrating contaminates.

Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete to acceptable condition per ACI 546.R-04.

Produce a surface profile equal to ICRI 310.25 CPS 2, CPS 3, or CPS 4. Leave surface free

of dust, dirt, laitance, and efflorescence.

D. Verify the substrate has proper levelness and flatness, or slope for drainage. If proper

levelness and flatness, or slope for drainage is not in the substrate notify the Architect and

General Contractor immediately. Do not proceed with flooring installation until the

conditions are corrected.

E. Verify proper surface profile per ICRI 310.25 CSP coupons. Perform water break test and

tape dust cleanliness test per ISO 8502-3 to determine surface is acceptable to proceed.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Apply Flooring System components according to manufacturer's written instructions. Produce a uniform, monolithic wearing surface of thickness, color and texture indicated.

1. Coordinate application of components. Provide optimum adhesion of coatings to

substrate, and optimum intercoat adhesion. 2. Cure coatings per manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during

application and curing processes.

3. Expansion, Isolation and Control Joint Treatment: At substrate expansion, isolation and control joints, comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Contractor shall keep daily logs recording the work performed and environmental

conditions as required by the materials manufacturer.

B. Vapor Control Primer Membrane: Apply over prepared substrate at required spreading rate.

C. Apply receiving coat at a rate of 125 square feet per gallon, broadcast #30 aggregate into the

wet coating.

D. Remove excess aggregate and apply another coat at 125 square feet per gallon

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean products after 96 hours cure in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic over flooring for 24 hours. Light foot traffic is acceptable

after 24 hours. Normal traffic after 48 hours.

C. Do not expose to harsh chemicals until full 7 days cure.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RESINOUS FLOORING AND COATING 096723 - 6

D. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

E. Provide floor protection acceptable to the materials manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on Interior substrates.

1. Steel.

2. Galvanized metal.

3. Gypsum board.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according

to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,

according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to

ASTM D 523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,

according to ASTM D 523.

E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application

instructions.

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category

specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

B. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to

verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects

and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of

each paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.

b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of

additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its

"MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and

substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat

manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. Colors: As selected by NMSU Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.

B. Base Coat: United States Gypsum, Product "First Coat", or equal.

3.2 METAL PRIMERS

A. Rust Inhibitive Latex Metal Primer: MPI #107.

B. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3

3.3 WOOD PRIMERS

A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.

3.4 SOLVENT-BASED COATINGS

A. Alkyd Varnish, Interior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #74.

3.5 LATEX PAINTS

A. Interior Latex (Satin): MPI #43 (Gloss Level 4).

B. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #43 (Gloss Level 4).

C. Interior Latex Fire Retardant: MPI #64

3.6 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements

for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter

as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent.

2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent.

3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.

4. Wood: 15 percent.

5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

6. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing

finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.7 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural

Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are

not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,

provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to

reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

3.8 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI

Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,

roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color

breaks.

C. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and

occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical Work:

a. Uninsulated metal piping.

b. Uninsulated plastic piping.

c. Pipe hangers and supports.

d. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets

and outlets.

e. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.

2. Electrical Work:

a. Switchgear.

b. Panelboards.

c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.

d. Telephone Backer Panels.

D. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of

other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and

leave in an undamaged condition.

E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or

defaced painted surfaces.

3.9 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Quick-Drying Latex Enamel System: MPI INT 5.1B. Gloss Level 4

a. Prime Coat: Rust Inhibitive Water Based primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: W.B. Light Industrial Coating.

c. Topcoat: W.B. Light Industrial Coating.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5

B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex over Waterborne Primer System: MPI INT 5.3J. Gloss Level 4

a. Prime Coat: Waterborne galvanized-metal primer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Interior latex.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. Gloss Level 3

a. Base Coat: KWAL 0873, Dunn Edwards Vinylastic (W101), USG First Coat.

b. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.

c. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.

d. Topcoat: Interior latex (Satin).

2. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. Gloss Level 4

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.

b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.

c. Top Coat: Interior latex topcoat. (Semigloss).

Note: Substrates not listed are subject to architectural review to determine the MPI standard during the

submittal process.

END OF SECTION 099123

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

INTERIOR SIGNAGE 101419 - 1

SECTION 101419 - INTERIOR SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Interior Signs.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance

Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and

Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For dimensional letter signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work.

2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by

others, and accessories.

3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, and layout for each sign.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in a sign schedule.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Provide written documentation of manufacturer’s warranty.

B. Warranty must guarantee interior signs for the life of the building.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INTERIOR SIGNAGE

A. Manufacturers

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

INTERIOR SIGNAGE 101419 - 2

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Century Sign Builders, which is located at 2117 Commercial

NE: Albuquerque, NM 87106, (505) 888-2901 or other providing equal Basis-of-Design

Product as approved by Architect.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Match facility standard. Coordinate with Owner

1. General Characteristics

a. Regulatory Compliance: All signs shall conform to the requirements of

regulations list in section 1.3 and shall be designed to meet the stated requirements

for color, contrast, letter height, install location and other characteristics required

for accessibility and by local, state and federal regulations.

b. Base material or chassis: NMSU Standard

i. Contractor to coordinate construction of interior signage with NMSU standards.

ii. Overall size and depth/curvature of sign frame as per approved shop drawings.

iii. Finishes for aluminum frame and end caps as per approved shop drawings

c. Lens or cover material: lens and covers shall be constructed using 0.125” (342-

101) or 0.0625” (322-101) clear single-ply non-glare acrylic multi-polymer

(Rowmark).

d. Changeable message inserts will be fabricated from commonly available

transparency media no less than 5 mil thick that is compatible with inkjet or laser

printers such as 3M CG3710 or equivalent.

e. Printed graphic inserts: Printed inserts will be created using a satin-coated, tear-

resistant, rigid PVC media with eco-solvent water fast & UV stable inks.

i. Printed background inserts must be manufactured in color managed workflow

with the following capacities:

ii. All printing must be done using a profiled printer with transmissible ICC profile.

iii. All approved colors used in final design must have LAB values recorded and

submitted to architect owner for future reference and duplication.

iv. Printing must be performed on calibrated printer such that future orders of in-

sert can be reproduced within 5 Delta E of recorded LAB values.

f. Tactile Raised Lettering/Graphic method: Tactile lettering and symbols shall be

formed using rotary engraving method and bonded to sign plaque using 3M Scotch

467HP adhesive. Text, numbers and symbols must have 1/32” return cut to 22-

degree angle. Text, numbers and symbols must be constructed with materials

having embedded coloration that is the final approved color for the signs. Products

with painted or otherwise applied coloration method are not acceptable.

g. Braille Method: Braille must be constructed using the Edgerton Grade 2 Braille

System using clear Raster beads.

h. Vinyl Graphics: As indicated on the shop drawings, signs may have text, graphics

or decorative elements created using applied vinyl graphics film. Such graphics

shall:

i. Be constructed on high performance cast vinyl graphic film products such as 3M

Scotchcal or equal with a 5 year or greater warranty.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

INTERIOR SIGNAGE 101419 - 3

ii. Signs shall be cut from sufficiently large rolls of material to minimize seams or

joining of material to create one sign.

iii. All lettering and graphics shall be computer cut from professionally quality

artwork. No hand cut vinyl film shall be installed.

iv. Signs shall be installed free of bubbles, wrinkles or other anomalies.

i. Other features:

i. Signs may be configured in one, two- or three-sided configurations for various

applications as wall mounted, suspended, flag mounted or free standing as per

the approved shop drawings.

j. Installation method:

i. Wall mounted signs: signs shall be mounted using double-sided vinyl foam tape

(1/16” thickness), silicon adhesive or mechanical anchors as per the approved

shop drawings.

ii. Flag mount hardware: provide custom mounting bracket for flag mounted signs

as indicated on shop drawings.

iii. Wall mount hardware: provide custom mounting hardware for wall mounted

signs as indicated on shop drawings.

iv. Suspended mount hardware: provide custom mounting hardware for ceiling

suspended mounted signs as indicated on shop drawings.

v. Free standing hardware: provide base plate and floor fasteners (optional) for free

standing signs as indicated on the shop drawings.

vi. Cubicle mounted hardware: provide removable mounting method for mounting

sign at cubicles, workstations or systems furniture partitions as indicated on the

shop drawings.

vii. Work surface hardware: provide angle bottom flange or stand to allow signs to

be displayed in a vertical (slightly angled) fashion when placed on transaction

counters, desks, etc. as indicated on the shop drawings.

2. Color Selections

a. Tactile lettering/graphics: NMSU Standard and as per approved shop drawings

b. Graphic insert: NMSU Standard and as per approved shop drawings

c. Changeable insert: NMSU Standard and as per approved shop drawings

d. Frame and mounting hardware: NMSU Standard and as per approved shop

drawings

3. Font Selections

a. Tactile lettering: NMSU Standard and as per approved shop drawings

b. Graphic insert lettering: NMSU Standard and as per approved shop drawings

c. Changeable insert lettering: NMSU Standard and as per approved shop drawings

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

INTERIOR SIGNAGE 101419 - 4

2.2 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist

water penetration and retention.

2. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring

exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed

and contact surfaces.

3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are

inconspicuous.

4. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners.

5. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to

existing work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where

possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

6. Castings: Fabricate castings free of warp, cracks, blowholes, pits, scale, sand holes, and

other defects that impair appearance or strength. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff

castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks before

finishing.

B. Brackets: Fabricate brackets, fittings, and hardware for bracket-mounted signs to suit sign

construction and mounting conditions indicated. Modify manufacturer's standard brackets as

required.

1. Aluminum Brackets: Factory finish brackets with baked-enamel or powder-coat finish [to

match sign-background color unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install signs using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's

written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign

surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that

would impair installation.

3. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with

grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous

paint.

B. Mounting Methods:

1. Concealed Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of

sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for

displaced adhesive. Place sign in position and push until flush to surface,

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

INTERIOR SIGNAGE 101419 - 5

embedding studs in holes. Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully

sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place sign in position and flush to surface, install

washers and nuts on studs projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

2. Projecting Studs: Using a template, drill holes in substrate aligning with studs on back of

sign. Remove loose debris from hole and substrate surface.

a. Masonry Substrates: Fill holes with adhesive. Leave recess space in hole for

displaced adhesive. Place spacers on studs, place sign in position, and push until

spacers are pinched between sign and substrate, embedding the stud ends in holes.

Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

b. Thin or Hollow Surfaces: Place spacers on studs, place sign in position with

spacers pinched between sign and substrate, and install washers and nuts on stud

ends projecting through opposite side of surface, and tighten.

3. Through Fasteners: Drill holes in substrate using predrilled holes in sign as template.

Countersink holes in sign if required. Place sign in position and flush to surface. Install

through fasteners and tighten.

4. Back Bar and Brackets: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install backbar

or bracket supports in position so that signage is correctly located and aligned.

5. Adhesive: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose

debris. Apply linear beads or spots of adhesive symmetrically to back of sign and of

suitable quantity to support weight of sign after cure without slippage. Keep adhesive

away from edges to prevent adhesive extrusion as sign is applied and to prevent visibility

of cured adhesive at sign edges. Place sign in position, and push to engage adhesive.

Temporarily support sign in position until adhesive fully sets.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as signs are installed.

END OF SECTION 101419

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

Laboratory Fume Hoods and Related Products 111610 - 1

SECTION 11610 – LABORATORY FUME HOODS AND RELATED PRODUCTS

PART 1: DESCRIPTION OF WORK

1.00 SUMMARY AND SCOPE

A. Section Includes:

1. Labconco Protector Laboratory Hoods – installation of Owner furnished fume hoods and under-

structures.

2. Testing of Installed fume hoods

C. Removal of all debris, dirt and rubbish accumulated as a result of the installation of the fume

hoods to an on-site container provided by others, leaving the premises clean and orderly.

D. Related Divisions:

1. Division 22

2. Division 23

E. Related Publications:

1. ASHRAE Standard 110.1995 - Method of Testing Performance of Laboratory Fume

Hoods

2. NSF STD#49 – Photometric Method of Testing

3. NIH03-112C - National Institute of Health Specification

4. UL – Underwriters Laboratories

5. ASTM D552 – Bending Test

6. NFPA-45 – National Fire Protection Association

1.01 BASIS OF WORK

A. It is the intent of this specification to use Protector Laboratory Hoods Instruction Manual as the stand-

ard for installation and testing for Owner Furnished, laboratory fume hoods.

B. Supply all equipment as required for the proper installation of the fume hood equipment as indicated

by the manufacturer.

C. Submittals:

1. Manufacturer’s Data: Submit manufacturer’s data and installation instructions for each

type of fume hood. Provide data indicating compliance with ASHRAE Standard

110.1995.

1.02 STANDARD FUME HOOD PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1. Test Method:

The hood shall be tested per the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air

Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Standard 110-1995 and by the Auxiliary Air Capture

Test (Auxiliary Air hoods only).

3. Location of Tests and Test Facility:

All tests referenced herein shall be field tested. Field testing is described in Section 3.01.F.

The test facility shall meet the following requirements:

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

Laboratory Fume Hoods and Related Products 111610 - 2

a. The facility’s ventilation system shall have adequate heating and air conditioning so

that room air temperatures can be maintained within the desired ranges.

b. Room air currents in the test area shall be less than 20 FPM.

c. The hood exhaust system shall be properly calibrated so that the desired exhaust air

volumes can be easily attained.

d. Instrumentation, Equipment and Test Personnel:

Qualified personnel to perform the tests shall be supplied by the bidder.

Instrumentation and equipment required shall be supplied by the bidder at his expense.

4. ASHRAE Standard 110-1995 Test:

Hood shall be tested with a face velocity of 100 FPM full open vertically and at 100 FPM

right, left and center 100% open horizontally. If horizontal openings are present,

additional sash configurations and face velocities may be specified. The hood shall have

a performance rating of 4.0 AI 0.01 or better wherein:

4.0 = tracer gas release in liters/minute

AI = as installed

0.01 = level of control of tracer gas in parts per million (ppm).

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The laboratory fume hood manufacturer shall provide fume hood work tops and casework all

manufactured or shipped from the same geographic location to assure proper staging,

shipment and single source responsibility.

B. General Performance: Provide certification that fume hoods meet the performance

requirements described in section 1.02.C.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

A. Fume Hood Electrical Services:

Final wiring and circuit dedication shall be by others.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.00 SITE EXAMINATION

The owner and/or his representative shall certify building conditions conducive to the installation

of a finished goods product, including all critical dimensions.

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Preparation:

Prior to beginning installation of fume hood, check and verify that no irregularities exist that

would affect quality of execution of work specified.

B. Coordination:

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

Laboratory Fume Hoods and Related Products 111610 - 3

Coordinate the work of the Section with the schedule and other requirements of other work

being performed in the area at the same time both with regard to mechanical and electrical

connections to and in the fume hoods and the general construction work.

C. Performance:

Install fume hoods, plumb, level, rigid, securely anchored to building and adjacent furniture

in proper location, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and the approved shop

drawings. Provide filler panels between top of hood and ceiling. Securely attach access

panels but provide for easy removal and secure reattachment. Do not install any damaged

units.

D. Adjust and Clean:

1. After installations are complete, adjust all moving parts for smooth operation.

2. Remove all packing materials and debris resulting from this work, and turn over the fume

hoods to the Owner clean and polished both inside and out.

3. Repair or remove and replace defective work, as directed by owner and/or his

representative upon completion of installation.

E. Protection:

1. Provide reasonable protective measures to prevent casework and equipment from being

exposed to other construction activity.

2. Advise owner and/or his representative of procedures and precautions for protection of

material, installed laboratory casework and fixtures from damage by work of other trades.

F. Certification:

1. Fume Hood Manufacturer shall field test the installed unit

using ANSI/ASHRAE 110-1995 to a control level of Al 0.01 ppm or better.

2. Project substantial completion shall be withheld until all required fume hood certification

letters, tests, and reports have been submitted to and approved by the Architect.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SPECIALTY CASEWORK 12 35 00- 1

SECTION 12 35 00 SPECIALTY CASEWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

1. Industrial Tall Double Door Cabinetry

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods.

C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, one set of color chips representing

manufacturer's full range of available colors.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum two years' experience installing similar products.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits

recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not store or install products under

environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: U-line

B. Substitutions: Equal substitutions permitted. Architect to determine what is considered

equal.

C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60

00 - Product Requirements.

2.2 INDUSTRIAL TALL DOUBLE DOOR CABINETRY

A. Style: Industrial Clear View Cabinet with 3-point lock and reinforced steel doors

B. Basis of Design: Model No. H-3109GR

C. Description: Industrial

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

SPECIALTY CASEWORK 12 35 00- 2

D. Dimensions: 36 x 24 x 72”

E. No. of Shelves: 5 (4 adjustable)

F. Shelf Cap: 150 Lbs.

G. Wt: 150 lbs.

H. Color: Grey

I. Thickness:

1. Doors, Sides & Back: 24 ga.

2. Top, Shelves, Header & Sill: 22 ga.

3. Bottom: 20 ga.

J. Capacity:

1. Fixed Bottom Shelf: 200lbs

2. Total Unit: 1,100 lbs

K. Material: powder coated paint

L. Includes: 2 keys, leveling feet.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of

unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500- 1

SECTION 26 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

Related Documents:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

Description of Work:

A. This section specified several categories of provisions for electrical work including:

1. Certain adaptive expansions of requirements specified in Division 01,

2. General performance requirements within the electrical systems as a whole,

and,

3. General work to be performed as electrical work, because of its close association.

Summary of Electrical Work:

A. Refer to the E-series drawings for graphic representations, schedules and notations showing electrical

work.

B. Refer to the Division 26 sections for the primary technical specifications of electrical work.

Coordination of Electrical Work:

A. Refer to the Division 01 sections for general coordination requirements applicable to the entire work.

It is recognized that the contract documents are diagrammatic in showing certain physical

relationships which must be established within the electrical work, and in its interface with other

work including utilities and mechanical work, and that such establishment is the exclusive

responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Arrange electrical work in a neat, well organized manner with conduit and similar services running

parallel with primary lines of the building construction and with a minimum of 7’0” o.c. where

possible.

C. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access and arrange entire electrical

work with adequate access for operation and maintenance.

D. Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the subsequent move-in of large units of

electrical work (equipment).

E. Contractor to identify all electrical circuits that serve the areas where no work will be performed and

all existing exterior circuits so that they are re-connected to the corresponding panel.

Coordinating Drawings:

A. For locations where several elements of electrical (or combined mechanical and electrical) work must

be sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit into the available space, prepare

coordination drawings (shop drawings) showing the actual physical dimensions (at accurate scale)

required for the installation if deemed necessary by Architect or Engineer. Prepare and submit these

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500- 2

coordination drawings, if required, prior to purchase-fabrication-installation of any of these elements

involved in the coordination.

B. The Drawings and these Specifications are complementary, each one to the other, and what is called

for in one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Carefully examine the Drawings and

Specifications and report any discrepancies affecting the work to the Architect. The Architect will

issue such written instructions or interpretations as may be required.

C. The Electrical Plans are diagrammatic but shall be followed as closely as actual construction and the

work of the other trades will allow. Such minor changes as are necessary to make the electrical work

conform to the work of other trades and to the building shall be made without cost to the Owner.

D. Circuits and feeders shall be as shown and no deviations from the indicated outlet-circuit grouping

will be permitted, except by permission of the Architect. Branch circuit numbers are for guidance

only and need not necessarily conform to the finished job. Actual circuit numbers used shall be

recorded on "As-built" drawings.

E. The maximum number of circuits combined in one raceway shall be two. The circuits shown on the

plan can be combined but must be shown on the 'AS BUILT' drawings.

Quality Assurance and Standards:

A. Refer to Division 01 for general administrative/procedural requirements related to compliance with

codes and standards. Specifically, for the work (in addition to standards specified in individual work

sections), the following standards are imposed, as applicable to the work in each instance:

AWS standards for welding

ANSI C 2, National Electrical Safety Code

ANSI C 73, Dimensions of Attachment Plugs and Receptacles

NECA standards for installation

NEMA standards for materials and products.

Laws, Codes and Ordinances:

A. All work and material shall conform to the requirements of O.S.H.A. and all National, and State

Laws and ordinances having jurisdiction at the job site. The (N.E.C.) National Electrical Code 2011

Edition, or latest edition being enforced, shall be strictly adhered to; N.E.C. requirements are

considered "minimum requirements". Where requirements of the Contract Documents exceed N.E.C.,

the Contract Document governs. This Contractor shall be licensed to work in the local area.

B. Specialty subcontractor (Fire Alarm, Security Systems, if applicable), shall be duly licensed by the

State of Texas to sell, install and service Fire Alarm and Security Systems. All employees shall be

duly registered, and records maintained as required by applicable State of Texas laws. The Specialty

Contractor shall submit a copy of his fire alarm and security systems license at the time of product

submittal.

C. The latest A.D.A. requirements governing this project must be adhered to.

D. Secure permits and pay permit and inspection fee as required by local authorities.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500- 3

E. Upon completion of the work, furnish to the Owner a certificate of final inspection and approval from

the electrical inspection bureau having jurisdiction.

F. All electrical systems shall be grounded in strict accordance with the requirements of the National

Electrical Code.

G. All electrical requirements must be coordinated with the local electric utility for temporary and

permanent service.

Submittal:

A. Refer to the Division 01 for general requirements conceding work related and administrative

submittal. All descriptive and technical data and shop drawings shall bear signed certification to the

effect that they have been carefully examined and found to the correct with respect to dimension,

space available, non-interference with other trades and that the equipment complies with all the

requirements of these specifications. Where catalog data is submitted, the proposed items shall be

clearly "flagged" or otherwise identified, so that no confusion exists. Without the above certification

shop drawings and submittal will no be approved.

B. Reproduced copies of product data showing pictures of item to be submitted shall be clear, sharp and

show product in detail. Reproduced copies where product picture is not clear or blurred will not be

accepted.

C. Submittal shall be separated into the following categories.

(1) Lighting Fixtures and Lamps (2) Wiring Devices (3) Switchgear (including

Switchboards, Panelboards and Motor Control Centers) (4) Motor/Circuit Disconnects and

Transformers (6) Special Systems (including Fire Alarm, P.A., Program/Clock, and

Intrusions Alarm), if applicable.

D. Each category shall be separately bound in booklet form; loose sheets or sheets merely stapled

together without report/presentation cover or soft cover will not be accepted.

E. Submittal which are not separated into the above-mentioned categories and/or not appropriately

bound will not be accepted.

Temporary Facilities:

A. Refer to the Division 01 sections for general requirements on temporary facilities. Except for self-

contained facilities, connect and terminate electrical temporary facilities at the locations indicated

or, if not otherwise indicated, at locations as determined by the Contractor to fulfill project

requirements.

B. Do not interrupt or disrupt power service to existing facilities of the Owner or others, except with

prearrangement and agreement on time of interruption as needed to make temporary connection

for temporary power service.

C. Do not subject electrical facilities (either temporary work or temporary use of permanent work) to

higher demand or loading than designed for. Where these conditions are present, the electrical

subcontractor shall be responsible for obtaining temporary electrical power from the local electric

utility. All charges for temporary service shall be borne by the General Contractor under his bid

price. Location, size, and type for service shall be compatible to job requirements.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500- 4

D. When temporary electrical service is no longer needed for construction work, remove electrical

temporary facilities and temporary provisions of all permanent electrical work. Repair and restore (or

replace) work damaged by installation and operation of electrical systems which have been used to

provide temporary services, to the condition of new and unused work except for normal wear.

E. Electrical work installed as temporary facilities shall, upon removal, remain property of the Installer.

F. Replace worn parts of permanent electrical work, where used as temporary facilities prior to the

Owner's acceptance and assumed operation. Where lamps of permanent electrical light fixtures have

been used for temporary lighting, replace lamps which have burned out or are noticeable dimmed by

temporary use.

Products, Electrical Work:

A. Refer to Division 01 sections for general requirements on products, materials, and equipment. The

following provisions expand or modify the requirement as applicable to electrical work.

B. Prepare the product listing for electrical work, separate from the listing(s) of products for other work.

Include listing of each significant item of equipment and material used in work; and indicate the

generic name, product name, manufacturer, model number, and related specification section

number(s). Material such as conductors, conduit and boxes taken from installer's stock need is not

listed.

C. For principal equipment items, list the input/output ratings.

D. Submit list within 30 days of Contract Date.

E. All material shall be new and shall bear the label of the Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., or be listed

under reexamination service. All materials shall be of the best grade and latest pattern of

manufacturer as specified. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner and shall

present a neat mechanical appearance when completed.

F. Provide products which are compatible with other products of the electrical work and with other work

requiring interface with the electrical work, including electrical connections and control devices. For

exposed electrical work, coordinate colors and finishes with other work.

Electrical Product Substitution:

A. Manufacturer's catalog numbers are specified for the purpose of establishing a standard.

Substitutions for electrical equipment, will be permitted, if submitted in writing, 14 days prior to the

Bidding Date, for approval by the Architect/Engineer, as being equal to, or better than, the specified

items in every respect. Electrical equipment, devices, etc. may have substitutions only in equal

appearance, quality, and function to, or better than, the specified item. Complete descriptive and

technical data shall be submitted on all proposed substitute items, together with the same data on the

specified items. Material samples of the proposed substitute item and the specified items shall be

submitted for comparison and test if requested by the Architect/Engineer.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500- 5

B. All requests for substitution of equipment shall be made in writing to the Architect no less than 14

days prior to bidding date, by each individual bidder, with the certification that the "substitute item"

is equal in appearance, quality, and function or better than the specified item in every detail. The

certification shall be signed by the individual holding the Master Electricians' License.

C. If notice of approval has NOT been published by the bid date, the request for substitution is

disapproved.

PARTS 2 AND 3 - PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION

Electrical System Identification:

A. Provide engraved plastic laminated nameplates at locations of major units of electrical equipment

including panelboards, control centers and similar systems. Additional and specific nameplate

requirements appear in other Division 26 Sections.

Cutting and Patching:

A. Comply with the requirements of Division 01 for the cutting and patching of other work to

accommodate the installation of electrical work. Except as individually authorized by the

Architect/Engineer, cutting, and patching of electrical work to accommodate the installation of other

work not permitted.

B. Do not cut structural framing, walls, floors, decks, and other members intended to withstand stress,

except with the Architect's or Engineer's written authorization. Authorization will be granted only

where there is no other reasonable method for completing the electrical work, and where the

proposed cutting clearly does not materially weaken the structure.

C. Where patching is required to restore other work because of either cutting or other damage inflicted

during the installation of electrical work, engage the original Installer to complete the patching of the

other work. Restore the other work in every respect, including the elimination of visual defects in

exposed finished, and judged by the Architect.

Excavating for Electrical Work:

A. The work of this article is defined to include whatever excavating and backfilling in the same area,

including dewatering, flood protection provisions and other temporary facilities. Coordinate the work

with other work in the same area, including other underground services (existing and new), landscape

development, paving, and floor slab on grade. Coordinate with weather conditions and provide

temporary facilities needed for protection and proper performance of excavating and backfilling.

Concrete for Electrical Work:

A. The work of this article is defined to include whatever concrete work in necessary or shown

specifically to install the electrical work; but excluding equipment base grouting (see applicable

Division 26 sections). Coordinate the work with other work, particularly other concrete work and

accessories.

B. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with applicable provisions of Division 03 sections for

electrical work concrete, including form work, reinforcement, mix design, materials (If not noted on

drawings, use mix designs and materials accepted for Division 03 work where possible), admixtures,

accessories (including water stops), placing of wet concrete, finishing, curing, protecting, testing,

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500- 6

submittal, and other requirements of the concrete work. Refer instances of uncertain applicability to

the Architect/Engineer for resolution before proceeding.

Electrical Work Closeout:

A. Refer to the Division 01 sections for general closeout requirements. Upon completion of the work,

the various systems operated under load conditions shall be tested for short circuits and grounds in

accordance with the method and resistance values outlined in the National Electrical Code and for

load balance on feeders and branch circuits.

B. The complete system shall operate satisfactorily in every respect. Make any repairs or adjustments

necessary to this end to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer. Furnish all instruments and labor

for testing.

C. Coordinate closeout operations with closeout of mechanical systems and other power consuming

equipment. Accurately record on "as-built" drawings locations of all conduits which are underground

or otherwise concealed. Test run electrical equipment in coordination with test runs of mechanical

system. Clean and lubricate operational equipment. Instruct Owner's operating personnel thoroughly

in the operation, sequencing, maintenance, and safety/emergency provision of the electrical systems.

Turn over the operations to the Owner's personnel at the time(s) of substantial completion. Until the

time of final acceptance of the total work of the Contract, respond promptly with consultation and

services to assist the Owner's personnel with operation of the electrical systems.

D. It shall be the responsibility of this contractor to verify electrical characteristics and horsepower of

mechanical equipment supplied at job site with that shown on Drawings. If the Mechanical and/or

Plumbing contractor furnish equipment of different horsepower and/or electrical characteristics from

that shown on the Drawings, he shall pay ALL costs required to furnish the proper electrical

facilities.

Notification of Discrepancies:

A. This Contractor shall study the Drawings and compare the layout of the electrical system, program

and clock system, telephone system and integrated communication system to determine that:

1. The system covers the units and is required, from a functional, as well as a Code point of

view. No area of coverage has been omitted.

2. The system has the appropriate conductors, pairs, or cables in the appropriate raceway,

connected to the end devices and interconnections to other systems has been shown.

Raceway is of adequate size to contain conductors or cables.

3. The system apparatus required to perform the function has been specified.

4. Discrepancies in description of equipment or materials shown on the Drawings or described

in the Specifications are brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer.

B. This Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer 14 WORKING DAYS prior to Bid Opening of

any discrepancies he has found. In the event this Contractor fails to notify the Architect/Engineer, it

will be assumed all discrepancies have been found by this Contractor and he has included sufficient

money in his bid to correct them.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500- 7

Guarantee:

A. The work to be performed shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after final acceptance against

faulty workmanship and/or materials, and any failure or trouble due to such causes within the period

of guarantee shall be made good upon demand of the Owner and without cost to the owner.

Miscellaneous Items:

A. Miscellaneous items not covered in these specifications shall be as indicated on the drawings,

installed, and connected in the proper method and as recommended by the manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 260500

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS 260503- 1

SECTION 26 05 03 - EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

Related Documents:

A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Division-26 basic Materials and Methods section and is part of each Division-26

section referring to electrical connections specified herein.

Description of Work:

A. Extent of electrical connections for equipment indicated by drawings and schedules. Electrical

connections are hereby defined to include, but not necessarily be limited to, connections for

providing electrical power to equipment.

B. Types of electrical connections specified in this section include the following:

To motors

To motor starters

From motor starters to motors

To lighting fixtures

C. Motor starters and controls not furnished integrally with equipment are specified in applicable

Division-26 sections.

D. Refer to other Division-26 section for junction boxes and disconnect switches required for motors

and other electrical units of equipment; not work of this section.

E. Temperature Controls for Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning shall be done under Division-23

Specifications.

F. Low voltage thermostat wiring shall be done under Division 23; this Contractor shall furnish empty

conduit with pull string only.

G. High voltage (line) thermostat wiring shall be #12 THHN (if applicable), unless otherwise noted on

Drawings. Number of conductors to each thermostat shall be as shown on Drawings as indicated by

number of hachure marks. Where no hachure marks are shown, a minimum of 2 conductors shall be

assumed. This Contractor shall verify number of conductors required with Division 23

Specifications, Mechanical drawings, Mechanical schedules, and equipment wiring diagrams.

Quality Assurance:

A. Comply with applicable portions of NEC as to type of products used and installation of electrical

power connections (Terminals and splices), junction boxes, motor starters, and disconnect switches.

B. Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to electrical connections for

equipment.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS 260503- 2

C. Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to products and installation of electrical

connections.

D. Provide electrical connection products and materials which have been listed and labeled by the

Underwriters Laboratories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Materials and Components:

A. For each electrical connection indicated, provide a complete assembly of materials, including but not

necessarily limited to, pressure connectors, terminal (lugs), electrical insulating tape, electrical solder,

electrical soldering flux, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire nuts, and other

items and accessories as need to complete splices and terminations of the type indicated.

Metal Conduit, Tubing and Fittings:

A. Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of the types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses)

indicated for each type of service. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection

as determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements; comply with NEC requirements for

raceways. Provide products complying with Division-26 basic materials and methods section

"Electrical Raceways", and in accordance with the following listing of metal conduit, tubing and

fittings.

Rigid non-metallic conduit

Rigid steel conduit

Rigid metal conduit fittings

Electrical metallic tubing

EMT fittings

Flexible metal conduit

Flexible metal conduit fittings

Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit

Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings

PVC covered rigid metal conduit

PVC covered rigid metal conduit fittings

A. Provide full length pull wire in ALL empty conduits to facilitate the future installation of conductors.

Wire, Cable and Connectors:

A. Provide wires, cables and connectors complying with Division-26 basic materials and methods

section "Wires and Cables".

B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires/conductors for electrical connections which match wires/

conductors of wiring supplying power.

C. Provide electrical connectors and terminals as recommended by connector and terminal manufacturer

for intended application.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS 260503- 3

Electrical Connection Accessories:

A. Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing and bolts, solder, electrical

soldering flux, wire nuts and cable ties as recommended for use by accessories manufacturers for

type services indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTIONS

Installation of Electrical Connections:

A. Install electrical connections as indicated; in accordance with connector manufacturer's written

instructions and with recognized industry practices and complying with requirements of NEC and

NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment in accordance with equipment

manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Wherever possible, mate and match

conductors of electrical connection for proper interface between electrical power supplies and

installed equipment.

C. Cover splices with electrical insulation equivalent to, or of a higher rating than, insulation on the

conductors being spliced.

D. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering, armor, jacket, and insulation properly to

ensure a uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated.

E. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection, testing and

maintenance.

F. Tighten wire-binding connector screws firmly.

G. Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit for connection of all motors.

H. Coordinate insulation of electrical connections for equipment with equipment installation.

I. Perform all work in conformance with job requirements, other applicable sections of these

specifications, governing

Codes and ordinances, and manufacture's instructions.

J. If the Mechanical and/or Plumbing Contractor furnishes equipment with horsepower or electrical

characteristics different from that shown on the drawings, he shall pay all costs required to furnish the

proper electrical facilities.

K. Motor starters and motor control devices that are not an integral part of the mechanical equipment

will be turned over to this contractor for installation and connection.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS 260503- 4

Electrical Equipment Identification:

A. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved

nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 3/64" thick, 3-ply, black surfaces and

white core. Engraving shall be Roman Gothic, at least 3/8" high appropriately spaced.

B. Nameplates shall be attached using #2 chromium plated, self-tapping, flat head Phillips screws, no

rivets or adhesives. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its make number,

area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be identified with

nameplate shall include, but not be limited to, the following.

Air Conditioning Controls Contractors

Individually Enclosed C.B.'s Relays

Panelboards Disconnect Switches

Motor Control Centers Switchboards

Starters Low Voltage Relay Panels

C. Nameplates for panelboards, motor control centers and switchboards shall be furnished and installed

at factory by manufacturer of equipment. Refer to respective Division-26 sections for additional

nameplate requirements.

D. Air washer and exhaust fan disconnect switches shall have engraved nameplates, screwed to the

outside cover of disconnect, with mechanical designation and room number served by the unit, (i.e.,

"EF-1, GYM-101"). Room numbers shall be those finally selected by the Owner; not necessarily

those shown on the Contract Documents.

E. Complete all identification cards (directories) for switches, starters, and other devices in all

distribution, lighting and applicable panelboards and similar pieces of equipment, on a typewriter in a

neat manner and insert the card in the card holder behind a piece of clear plastic. Where the card size

is insufficient for the proper identification of all circuits, the index shall be made on a large sheet of

paper of proper proportion, and then photo-reduced to fit the card holder.

F. Remote light switches and all control and equipment switches (i.e., exhaust fans, etc.) shall be

identified by ENGRAVING the switch plate and NOT by micarta nameplate. Plates shall be stainless

steel as hereinafter specified. Engraving shall be 3/16" Roman gothic and shall be filled with black

enamel. Nomenclature shall include the area, control, or equipment served.

END OF SECTION 260503

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519- 1

SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

Related Documents:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division-01 Specifications sections apply to work of this section.

Description of Work:

A. The extent of electrical cable and electrical wire work is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B. The applications for cable, wire and connectors required on the project as follows:

Power and lighting distribution circuitry

Equipment connections and control circuitry

Fire Alarm System circuitry

Public Address circuitry

Program and Clock circuitry

Quality Assurance:

A. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70), latest edition, as applicable to construction

and installation of electrical cable, wire and connectors.

B. Provide electrical cable, wire and connectors which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters

Laboratories.

C. Comply with applicable portions of NEMA/Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association

standards pertaining to materials, construction and testing wire cable.

D. Comply with applicable portions of ANSI/ASTM standards pertaining to construction of wire and

cable.

E. Comply with applicable portions of IEEE standards pertaining to construction of wire and cable.

Submittal:

A. Submit manufacturer's data on electrical cable, wire and connectors when requested by the

Engineer and/or Architect. Refer to Section 26 05 00 for additional requirement on product data

submittal.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519- 2

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Cable, Wire and Connectors:

A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide cable, wire and connectors of manufacturer standard

materials, as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as

recommended by the manufacturer, and as required for the installation.

WIRE:

B. Provide factory-fabricated wire of the size, rating, materials and type as indicated for each

service. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with

installation requirements and with NEC Standards. Select from only the following types,

materials, conductor configurations, insulations, and covering:

UL Type: THW

UL Type: THHN/THWN (dual rated)

UL Type: THWN

Material: Copper

Conductors: Solid (AWG 20 to 10 only)

Conductors: Concentric-lay-stranded (standard flexibility)

CABLE:

A. Provide factory-fabricated cable of sizes, ratings, materials and jacketing/sheating as indicated for

each type service. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by installer to

comply with installation requirements and with NEC Standards.

B. Conductors #6 AWG and larger shall by type THW or THWN. Conductors #8 and smaller shall

be type THHN/THWN. Except that #14 AWG for class 2 remote control and signal circuits may

be commercial fixture wire type RF-2 or TF. Conductors shall be 98% conductivity, copper.

Insulation types THW, THHN/THWN #2 AWG and smaller, for the purpose of this specification

shall have a capacity of the same size wire with 60 degrees Celsius insulation.

C. All wire on this project shall be new, unused, in good condition and shall be delivered in standard

coils, packages and reels. Samples of all wire shall be submitted by the Contractor when so

requested by the Owner’s duly authorized representative for the purpose of determining

acceptability of the wire. Wire which has been rejected by the Owner or Owner's representative

shall not be used again. Such rejected wire shall be removed from the Owner's premises

forthwith. Decision as to the quality of the wire furnished and the acceptance of such wire shall

be made by the Owner's duly authorized representative.

D. No conductor smaller than #12 wires shall be used for lighting purposes. In the case of

"homeruns", no conductor smaller than a #10 wire shall be used for runs over 50 feet in length on

120v circuits.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519- 3

E. The sizing of all wire, except remote-control wire, shall be accomplished in the case of both

feeder and branch circuits by conforming to the following provisions:

F. The voltage drop in the case of 120/208 volts shall not exceed 3.0% at maximum load and 80.0%

power factor. Service and feeder shall not exceed 1.0% voltage drop at maximum load and 85%

power factor; iron conduit only considered.

G. Conductors of #10 and smaller sizes of wire shall be solid members unless otherwise specifically

called for on the plans. Conductors #8 and larger sizes of wire shall be stranded conductors unless

otherwise specifically called for on the plans. The color of the wire shall be selected to conform

to all instances to the following table:

COLOR-PHASE TABLE FOR WIRE

208 VOLT SYSTEM 480 VOLT SYSTEM

Neutral White Neutral Grey

Phase A Black Phase A Brown

Phase B Red Phase B Orange

Phase C Blue Phase C Yellow

Grounding Conductor - Green Grounding Conductor - Green

H. Should tape be used for color coding, it shall cover not less than 6" of conductor within enclosure

wherever possible. Color coding shall be with tape such as that manufactured by the Minnesota

Mining and Manufacturing Company for this purpose.

I. Remote-control wires, other than Class-2 Remote Control and Signal circuits, shall be no smaller

than #14 conductors. Control wires shall be run in separate conduits.

J. Lighting fixtures shall not be used for raceways for circuit other than parallel wiring of fixtures.

K. When leaving a metal raceway or conduit in a cabinet, box, switch enclosure, control enclosure

or any other like member, conductors shall be protected by means of insulated bushings or end

fittings.

L. Conductors may be run in multiple size 1/0 to 500 MCM inclusive, provided all multiple

conductors are the same size, length and type of insulation. Not more than three conductors may

be run in multiple, and they shall be so arranged and terminated as to ensure equal division of the

total current between all conductors involved. Where multiple connections are contemplated,

approval of the Owner's duly representative must be obtained before installation is made.

Connectors:

A. Provide factory-fabricated, metal compression type connectors of sizes, rating, materials, types,

and classes as indicated for each service. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as

determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements and NEC standards. NO SET

SCREW CONNECTORS OR COUPLINGS ALLOWED.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519- 4

B. No splices or taps shall be made in any conductors except in outlet boxes, pull boxes, panelboard

boxes, manholes, splice boxes or other exposed locations. All taps and splices shall be made with

solderless connections and insulated in a manner providing an effective insulation equal to that of

the adjoining wire. Any splice or tap shall be made only on such conductors as are a component

part of a single circuit.

PART 3 EXECUTION

Installer:

A. Install electrical cables, wires and connectors as indicated, in compliance with the manufacturer's

written instructions, applicable requirements of the NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation",

and in accordance with recognized industry practices.

B. Coordinate cable and wire installation work with electrical raceway and equipment installation

work, as necessary for proper interface. Prior to pulling cables or conductors into raceways,

inspect interiors of raceways; remove burrs, dirt and construction debris.

C. Pull conductors together where more than one is being installed in a raceway. Care shall be

exercised while installing wire in conduits so as not to injure conductor insulation. Bending

radius of insulated wire or cable shall not exceed manufacturer's recommended values.

D. Use pulling compound or lubricant, when necessary; compound must not deteriorate conductor

and insulation and shall be U.L. listed.

E. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable or rope which can not damage the raceway.

Maximum pulling tension of any wire or cable shall not exceed manufacturer's recommended

values.

F. Keep conductor splices to a minimum. Splices shall not be permitted except in junction boxes,

outlet boxes or as previously listed in this section. Splices must be accessible.

H. Install splices and taps which have mechanical strength and insulation rating equivalent-or-better

than conductor.

I. Use splice and tap conductors which are compatible with the conductor material.

J. Provide nylon pull wire for every empty raceway to facilitate the future installation of wires.

Field Quality Control:

A. Prior to energization, test cable and wire for continuity of circuitry and also for short circuits.

Correct malfunction when detected.

B. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in

accordance with requirements.

END OF SECTION 260519

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 260533- 1

SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

Related Documents:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Condition

and Division-01 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods Section and is part of each Division-

26 section referring to electrical raceways specified herein.

Description of Work:

A. The extent of raceways is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B. The types of raceways in this section include the following:

Electrical metallic tubing

Flexible metal conduit

Intermediate metal conduit

Liquid-Tight flexible metal

Rigid metal conduit

Underground plastic utilities duct

Quality Assurance:

B. Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways.

C. Comply with applicable portions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems;

and provide products and components which have been UL-listed and labeled.

D. Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction and installation of raceway

systems.

Submittal:

A. Submit manufacturer's data on electrical raceways when requested by Engineer and/or Architect.

Refer to Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements of product data submittal.

Product Delivery, Storage and Handling:

A. Provide color-coded end cap thread protectors on exposed threads of metal conduit.

B. Handle conduit and tubing carefully to prevent bending and end-damage, and to avoid scoring

finish.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 260533- 2

C. Store pipe and tubing inside and protect from weather. When necessary, to store outdoors,

elevate well above grade and enclose with durable watertight wrapping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Materials and Components:

A. For each electrical raceway system indicated, provide assembly of conduit, tubing or duct and

fittings including but not necessarily limited to connectors, couplings, offsets, elbows, strap,

bushings, expansion joints, hangers and other components and accessories as needed for a

complete system. SET SCREW CONNECTORS ARE NOT ALLOWED.

B. Each length of rigid conduit shall have both ends threaded. The extremities shall be reamed to

remove all burrs and sharp edges. Each length of conduit shall be marked with the name and

trademark of the manufacturer and the stamp of approval of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

C. Each length of conduit shall be provided with one coupling attached and the threads of the end of

the conduits having no coupling shall be protected by use of suitable thread protectors. All

couplings and other fittings such as bends, or elbows shall be protected against corrosion in the

same way the conduit itself is protected. All bends for conduit of 1-1/4" or larger shall either be

factory manufactured elbows or be made using a bending machine meeting the approval of the

Owner's duly authorized representative. Under no circumstances shall any bend be installed if the

conduit from which it is fabricated is injured in any manner during, or by, the bending process.

The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any field bend shall not be less than the

recommendation of the National Electrical Code. Under no circumstances shall the internal cross

section area of any conduit be appreciably reduced by any bending process.

D. EMT connectors and couplings shall be of the watertight threaded compression type, having steel

gland nuts. Indenter or threadless type fittings are prohibited. NO SET SCREW CONNECTORS

OR COUPLINGS ALLOWED.

E. Conduits 1/2" and 3/4" trade size may be installed in concrete slabs, or near to the center of the

slab as possible.

F. Conduits installed in direct contact with the earth, except where PVC is indicated and/or specified

shall be rigid galvanized steel, field spirally wrapped (half-lapped) with one layer of 1" wide 3M

Scotch rap #50 plastic tape with a 50% overlap, including all joints or couplings, or shall be

coated with a bonded, 20 mil minimum thickness PVC, permanently fused at the factory,

Pittsburgh Standard Co., "Plastic-Bond", or approved equal. At Contractor's option PVC

externally coated rigid steel conduit may be used without spiral wrap.

G. On all circuit conduits, 1/2" to 6", this contractor shall use O.S. Electrical Manufacturing Co.

Type IBC-L-BC insulated conduit bushings for all conductors #6 and up where they enter or

leave the cabinet box.

H. Where thin wall conduit is terminated into cabinet, junction box, outlet box, pull box, auxiliary

gutter, etc., the conduit shall be secured with a nylon insulated throat compression type box connector.

All thin wall conduit couplings shall be compression type only.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 260533- 3

I. Ground clamps shall be provided on conduits stubbed up into the motor control center, panel

board or switchboard and all conduits connected to the ground bus.

Metal Conduit, Tubing and Fittings:

A. Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thickness) for

each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection

determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable portions of

NEC for raceways.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: FS WW-CO581 and ANSI C80.1.

C. Intermediate Steel Conduit: FS WW-C-581.

D. PVC Externally Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1 and NEMA std. Pub. No. RN 1.

E. Rigid Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-408, types, kinds and styles as indicated.

F. EMT: FS WW-C 563 and ANSI C80.3.

G. EMT Fittings: FS W-F-408; types, classes and kinds as indicated.

H. Flexible Metal Conduit: FS WW-C-566, Type II, zinc coated steel. Aluminum, Type I, not

acceptable.

I. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS WW-F-406; Types 1, Class 1

STYLE A

A. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit; constructed of

single strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked and double-wrapped steel; galvanized inside and

outside; coat with liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC). SHALL NOT be used

for outdoor installations.

B. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: FS W-F-406; Type 1, Class 3, Style G.

C. Non-metallic Conduit, Ducts and Fittings:

D. Provide non-metallic conduit, ducts and fittings of types, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for

each service allowed. Where types are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by the

Installer to fulfill the wiring requirements and comply with applicable portions of NEC for

raceways.

E. PVC Conduit and tubing Fittings: NEMA stds. No. TC 2 PVC Schedule 40 minimum.

F. Underground PVC Plastic Utilities Duct: Not Permitted.

G. Liquid-tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit: Not Permitted.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 260533- 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Installation:

A. Install electrical raceways where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction,

applicable requirements of NEC and NECA "Standard of Installation" and complying with

recognized industry practices.

B. Coordinate with other work including metal and concrete deck work, as necessary to interface

installation of electrical raceways and components.

C. Conduit shall be provided for all wiring circuits as indicated. Material shall be exposed or

concealed as required by the Drawings. Exposed conduit shall be run straight and true to building

lines. All conduits shall be rigidly supported by means of straps or hangers best suited for work.

If ceiling support system is adequate, one 3/4" maximum conduit may be supported by a Caddy

clip to hanger wire. Multiple runs of conduits shall be racked on trapeze hangers. All support

materials shall be rust-proof. Perforated tape or wire shall not be used. DO NOT USE WIRE TO

SUPPORT OR ANCHOR ANY CONDUIT.

D. All ends of the conduit shall be properly reamed to remove rough edges and whenever a conduit

enters a box or other fitting, it shall be securely fastened by the use of a locknut inside and outside

of the box or fittings. An approve bushing shall be installed on the ends of all conduit in such a

manner as to protect the wire from abrasion. The Contractor shall so lay out and install the

conduit systems as to avoid all other services or systems, the proximity of which may prove

injurious to the conduit or conductors which it confines. All conduit systems except those

otherwise specifically shown to the contrary, shall be concealed in the building construction.

E. The contractor shall run all conduits in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's duly representative.

On exposed systems, support shall be provided at intervals of 6 feet. On concealed circuits,

support shall be provided at intervals of no more than 8 feet. No feeder conduit run shall be

longer than 80 feet between junction boxes, cabinets or circuit interrupting devices unless there

are no direction changes and only a straight-in-line pull of wire is involved. In such straight-in-

line runs between junction boxes, cabinets or circuit interrupting devices, a run not to exceed 100

feet in length may be made.

F. Boxes shall be square and flush with finished surfaces and suitable anchored in place.

G. Conduit installation shall be in strict accordance with the NEC and best current practice. Conduit

system shall be complete from pull to point to pull point before wire is pulled in it. Upon

completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; remove burrs, dirt and

construction debris.

H. Conduit crushed or otherwise deformed shall not be installed and shall be removed from the job

site without delay.

I. Conduit runs shall be sealed after installation to prevent accumulation of water, dirt and other

foreign materials. Conduit in which such accumulation of water, dirt and other foreign materials.

Conduit in which such accumulation occurs shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Owner's

representative or replaced.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 260533- 5

J. Conduit crossing expansion joints shall be provided with suitable expansion fitting. Exposed

conduits below the five (5) foot level shall be galvanized rigid conduit.

K. Conduits exposed on room or other exterior (outdoor) locations, not in direct contact with earth,

shall be galvanized rigid steel or IMC.

L. EMT Steel tube may be used in sizes up to and including 2" in all interior work, except that it

SHALL NOT be used in concrete, underground, underfloor, in any damp or outdoor locations, or

in any location where there is a likelihood of mechanical injury.

M. Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit for all motor connections. Liquid tight flexible metal

conduit SHALL NOT be used for outdoor installations.

N. Flexible metal conduit shall be used ONLY for tap connections to lay-in lighting fixtures and in

accordance with NEC Article 410-117 (c).

O. Conduits routed above the acoustical "lay-in" ceilings shall be anchored to the building structure

and not on the ceiling. Wire shall not be used to anchor boxes to structure. Junction boxes shall

be installed on the structural members. Flexible metal conduits extended down to light fixtures

from junction boxes shall not exceed 6 ft. length and be in accordance with NEC Article 410-117

(c). Flexible metal conduit shall be strapped and/or supported such that it not lay atop acoustical

lay-in ceiling tile.

P. The Contractor shall so lay out and install conduit runs as to avoid close proximity to hot water

pipes. In no case shall a conduit be run within 3" of such pipes, except where crossings are

unavoidable and then the conduit shall be kept at least 1" from the covering on the pipe crossed.

Wherever possible, install horizontal raceway runs and above water and steam piping.

Q. The Contractor shall furnish and install a full-length nylon pull cord in EVERY empty conduit

installed hereunder to facilitate the future installation of wires. Identify each terminus of pull wire

and linen tags and with complete information as to service and location of terminus of the cord.

R. Steel conduit may be embedded in concrete providing the outside diameter does not exceed 1/3

the thickness of the concrete lab, wall or beam is located entirely within the center third of the

member and the lateral spacing of conduits is not less than 3 diameters.

S. Non-metallic conduit or duct may be used for underground branch circuits, underground feeders

or underground service conduits only. Non-metallic conduit when installed outside of building

foundation shall be buried 24" below ground. When non-metallic conduit is extended underneath

building foundation concrete encasement is not required and conduit shall be buried 18" below

foundation. BEFORE STUBBING UP, ADAPT TO GALVANIZED RIGID ELBOWS. Elbows

shall be wrapped as indicated under MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS.

T. Non-metallic conduit is not permitted above grade or finished floor.

U. Contractor shall furnish and install a ground bonding conductor as required by NEC. This

Contractor shall size the ground conductor as per NEC Art. 250 taking voltage drop into

consideration. The addition of the grounding conductor may require an increase in conduit size

and conduit fill shall be computed using the appropriate NEC tables. This Contractor shall submit

recalculated branch, feeder, or service conduit, taking the additional ground conductor into

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM 260533- 6

account, to the Engineer for approval.

V. All non-metallic conduit or duct runs, whether shown on the Drawings or not, shall have a ground

bonding conductor, size as noted and/or as required by the NEC. The bond or equipment served

shall be grounded to a grounding conductor to provide a good return path to service panel.

W. This contractor shall be responsible for sealing all new conduit penetrations, through new and

existing walls, ceiling or floors. The seal shall be acceptable to Architect/Engineer and maintain

the integrity of the wall, ceiling or floor fire rating. 3M brand fire barrier caulk #CP-25 and putty

#303 are considered acceptable for this purpose.

X. All roof penetrations shall be done using "portal-plus" pre-molded flexible boot flashing.

END OF SECTION 260533

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

OUTLET JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 260534- 1

SECTION 26 05 34 - OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

Related Documents:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division-01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section and is a part of each Division-26

section referring to electrical wiring boxes and fittings specified herein.

Description of Work:

A. Extent of electrical box and electrical fitting work is indicated by drawings and in schedules.

B. The types of electrical box and electrical fitting work is indicated by drawings and in schedules.

C. The types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following:

Outlet boxes

Junction boxes

Pullboxes

Conduit bodies

Bushings

Locknuts

Quality Assurance:

A. Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical boxes and fittings.

B. Provide electrical boxes and fittings which have been UL listed and labeled.

C. Comply with ANSI C134.1 (NEMA Standards Pub. No. OS 1) as applicable to sheet-steel outlets

boxes, device boxes, covers and box supports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Fabricated Materials:

A. Provide galvanized flat rolled sheet steel interior outlet wiring boxes of types, shapes and sizes

including box depths to suit each respective location and installation; construct with stamped

knockouts in back and sides and with threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for

securing box covers and wiring devices.

B. Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting brackets,

wallboard hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet

boxes which are compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements of individual

wiring situations. Choice of accessories is Installer's option.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

OUTLET JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 260534- 2

C. In standard partitions and suspended ceilings four-inch octagonal boxes shall be 2-1/8" deep:

Appleton #40D1/2 (Universal 54171-1/2), 4" Oct. x 2-1/8" Deep, four 1/2" K.O.'s in sides, five 1/2"

K.O.'s in top.

Appleton #40DSPL (Universal 54171 SPL), 4" oct. x 2-1/8" Deep, two 1/2" K.O.'s and two 3/4"

K.O.'s in sides, three 1/2" K.O.'s and two 3/4" K.O.'s in top.

Appleton #40D3/4 (Universal 54171-3/4), 4" Oct. x 2-1/8" Deep four 3/4" K.O.'s in sides, three 1/2"

K.O.'s and two 3/4" K.O.'s in top.

D. In standard partitions and suspended ceilings where conduits of greater size than 3/4" are employed

boxes shall be 4" square, 1-1/2" deep:

Appleton #4SDI (Universal 53171-1) 4" Sq. x 2-1/8" Deep, Eight 1" K.O.'s in sides, three 1/2" & two

3/4" K.O.'s in top.

E. In thin partitions measuring 3-1/2" or less, boxes shall be 4" square, 1-1/2" deep:

Appleton #4S3/4 (Universal 5251-3/4), 4" sq. x 1-1/2" deep, Eight 3/4" K.O.'s in sides, three 2" and

two 3/4" in top.

F. All wall or bracket outlets using octagon boxes shall be equipped with 3/8" no-bolt fixture stud.

G. Switch and outlet boxes shall use the same size boxes as specified above. Provide boxes with the

appropriate covers and with required "raise" to finish flush with surface.

H. The following requirements shall apply to exposed as well as concealed conduit systems. When

"gang" arrangements of outlets are employed 2-3/4" deep "gang" boxes shall be used. These "gang"

boxes shall have dimensions which are not smaller than those shown in the following table.

NUMBER IN GANG SIZE

3 4 - 1/2" x 8 -5/8"

4 4 - 1/2" x 10 -1/2"

5 4 - 1/2" x 12 -1/4"

6 4 - 1/2" x 14"

7 4 - 1/2" x 16"

8 4 - 1/2" x 17 -3/4"

I. Where "gang" boxes are in woodwork or in wooden partitions, the depth of the boxes shall be

reduced to 1 - 3/4".

J. Provide corrosion-resistant cast metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes of types, shapes and sizes,

including depth of boxes with threaded conduit ends, cast metal face plates with spring-hinged

waterproof caps suitably configured for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion-

resistant fasteners.

K. Provide galvanized code gauge sheet steel junction and pull boxes with screw-on covers; of types,

shapes and sizes to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped

with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers. Outdoor pull boxes shall be cast iron NEMA 4.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

OUTLET JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES 260534- 3

L. Provide galvanized cast-metal conduit bodies of types, shapes and sizes, to suite respective locations

and installation, construct with threaded-conduit-entrance ends, removable covers and corrosion-

resistant screws.

M. Provide corrosion-resistant punched-steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts, conduit bushings,

and offset connectors of types and sizes to suit respective uses and/or installation. Provide conduit

bushings and connectors as specified under Section 26 05 33 Raceway and boxes for Electrical

System.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Installation of Boxes and Fittings:

A. Install electrical boxes and fittings where indicated, complying with manufacturer written

instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in

compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway installation work.

C. Special Systems Junction Boxes shall be painted in the following color scheme for easier

identification during construction and inspections (if applicable):

Red - Fire Alarm System

Blue - P.A. System

Yellow - Program and clock System

D. Provide weatherproof outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture.

Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed.

E. Install boxes and conduit bodies to ensure ready accessibility of electrical wiring. Avoid using round

boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box which would result in difficult and insecure

connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded surface. Fasten boxes rigidly to

substrates or structural surfaces to which attached or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or

masonry. Wire shall not be used to anchor boxes to structure. Provide electrical connections for

installed boxes.

F. All j-boxes must be clearly labeled, including circuit number, panel number and room in which it

originates.

END OF SECTION 260534

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

DISCONNECT SWITCHES 262313- 1

SECTION 26 23 13 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

Related Documents:

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Division 26 Basic Materials and Methods section and is part of each division 26

section making reference to motor and circuit disconnect switches specified.

Description of Work:

A. The extent of motor and circuit disconnect switch work is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B. The types of motor and circuit disconnect switches in this section include the following:

1. Equipment disconnects.

2. Appliance disconnects.

3. Motor-circuit disconnects.

Quality Assurance:

A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical

motor and circuit disconnect switches.

B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide motor and circuit disconnect switches which have been

UL listed and labeled.

C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Std.

Submittals:

A. Product data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions and

general recommendations for each type of motor and circuit disconnect switch required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Acceptable Manufacturers:

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following

(for each type of switch)

1. Cutler-Hammer, Inc.

2. General. Electric Co.

3. Square D Company

4. Siemens

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

DISCONNECT SWITCHES 262313- 2

B. No other manufacturer's products will be considered for installation on this project.

Fabricated Switches:

A. General-Duty Disconnect Switches: GENERAL DUTY SWITCHES ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE

ON THIS PROJECT. Only heavy-duty switches shall be installed as specified in this section.

General duty switches erroneously installed on job shall be replaced with heavy duty switches of

type required wherever found.

B. Heavy-Duty Safety Switches: Provide surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, sheet steel enclosed

safety switches, of the types, sizes, and electrical characteristics indicated; Fusible rated, rated for

ampacity of circuit and system voltage as a minimum as noted on drawings. Switches shall be of

pole configuration required for application with a solid neutral if needed; incorporating quick-

make, quick-break type switches; so, constructed that switch blades are visible in "OFF" position

with door open. Equip with operating handle, which is easily recognizable, and is padlock able in

the “OFF" position; construct current carrying parts of positive pressure type reinforced fuse

clips. Where noted on the contract documents, provide non-fuse disconnect switches of the same

class construction listed above. All switches shall be provided with a ground lug.

C. Provide rain-tight switches for outside locations and as noted on the drawings, or where required

by code enforcing authorities.

1. Fuses: Provide fuses for safety switches, noted on the drawings, or as recommended by

the switch manufacturer, of classes, types, and ratings needed to fulfill electrical

requirements for service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Installation of Motor Circuit Disconnect Switches:

A. Install: Motor and circuit disconnect switches where indicated, complying with the

manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA and NECA's

"Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that

products fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate motor and circuit disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway and

cable work, as necessary for proper interface.

C. Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances, and motors and controllers within

sight of the controller position unless otherwise indicated.

Disconnect Identification:

A. Provide nameplates on disconnect switches. Nameplates shall be two- or three-color laminated

plastic, a minimum of 3/64" thick, so that letters will be white on black background. Engraving

shall be Roman Gothic at least 3/8" high appropriately spaced.

B. Nameplates shall be secured to equipment with chromium plated self-tapping screws (no

adhesives, no rivets).

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

DISCONNECT SWITCHES 262313- 3

C. Nameplate on disconnect shall give equipment designation and where disconnect is fed from.

Example: “ACU-1” fed from panel ‘M’.

Field Quality Control:

A. Testing: After completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches, energize circuits and

demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Except as otherwise indicated, do not

test switches by operating them under load. However, demonstrate switch operation through six

opening/closing cycles with circuit unloaded. Open each switch enclosure for inspection of

interior, mechanical and electrical connections, fuse installation, and for verification of type and

rating of fuses installed. Correct deficiencies then retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and

replace defective units with new units and retest.

END OF SECTION 262313

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PANELBOARDS 262416- 1

SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

Related Documents:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General, Supplementary conditions,

Special Provisions and Division - 01 Specification Section, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Devision-26 Basic Materials and Methods Section and is a part of each Division-

26 Section referring to panelboards specified herein.

Description of Work:

A. The extent of panelboard and enclosure work, including cabinets and cutout boxes is indicated by

drawings and in schedules.

B. The types of panelboards and enclosures required for project include the following:

Power-distribution panelboards

Lighting and appliance panelboards

C. Refer to other Division-26 Sections for cable/wire, connectors and electrical raceway work

required in conjunction with panelboards and enclosures, not work of this section.

Quality Assurance:

A. Comply with applicable UL safety standards pertaining to panelboards and accessories, and

enclosures; provide units which have been UL listed and labeled.

B. Comply with NEC is applicable to installation of panelboards, cabinets, and cutout boxes.

C. Comply with NEMA Stds. Pub. No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volt

maximum)" Pub. No. 1, "Panelboards", and installation portion of Pub. No.PB1.1, "Instructions

for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less."

General:

A. Refer to Section 26 05 00 for general requirements on submittals.

Product Data:

A. Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions and general

recommendations, for each type of panelboard required. Include data substantiating that units

comply with requirements.

B. Submit dimensioned drawings of panelboards and enclosures showing accurately scaled layout of

enclosures and required individual panelboard devices, including but not necessarily limited to,

circuit interrupters and accessories.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PANELBOARDS 262416- 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS:

Acceptable Manufacturers:

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type

of panelboard and enclosure):

Siemens

Square D

General Electric Company

Eaton

Panelboards:

A. Panelboards shall be of domestic design and construction. Except as otherwise indicated, provide

panelboards, enclosures and ancillary components of types, sizes, and rating indicated, which

comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with

published product information; equip with number of unit panelboard devices as required for

complete installation. Where no more than one type of component meets indicated requirements,

selection is Owner's option. Where types, sizes, or ratings are not indicated, comply with NEC,

UL and established industry standards for applications indicated. Panelboard dimensions shall not

exceed type panelboard specified on the Drawings and Schedules.

B. Provide dead-front safety type power distribution panelboards as indicated, with panelboard

switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and with arrangement shown; with

anti-turn solderless pressure type main lug connectors approved for copper conductors. Construct

unit for connecting feeder at top or bottom of panel to suit job conditions. Equip with tin-plated

copper bus bars and full-sized neutral bus; provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing

feeders requiring neutral connections.

C. Provide molded-case main and branch circuit breaker types for each circuit, with toggle handles

that indicate when tripped. Where multiple-pole breakers are indicated, provide with common trip

so overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Provide a copper bare uninsulated

grounding bar suitable for bolting to enclosure. Provide panelboards fabricated by same

manufacturer as enclosures and which fit properly with enclosures. Main panelboards shall have

UL Service Entrance Labels.

D. Provide dead-front safety type lighting and appliance panelboards as indicated with switching and

protective devices in quantities, ratings, types and arrangement shown; with anti-burn solderless

pressure type lug connectors approved for copper conductors; construct unit for connecting

feeders at top or bottom of panel to suit job conditions; equip with tin-plated Copper bus bars,

full-sized neutral bar.

E. Provide molded case branch circuit breakers for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicate

when tripped. Where multiple-pole circuit breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so

overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PANELBOARDS 262416- 3

F. Provide suitable lug on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder required; provide a copper bare

uninsulated ground bar suitable for bolting to enclosure; and provide panelboards fabricated by

same manufacturer as enclosure, and which mate properly with enclosures. Where a lighting and

appliance panelboard serves as a main panelboard, it shall have a UL Service Entrance Label.

G. Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type enclosures, in sixes and NEMA types as indicated,

code-gage, minimum 16-gauge thickness. Construct with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters.

Provide fronts with adjustable indicating trim clamps and doors with flush locks and keys, all

panelboard enclosures keyed alike with concealed door covering. Provide baked gray enamel

finish over a rus inhibitor. Design enclosure for surface or recessed mounting as required.

Provide enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, and which fit properly with

panelboards to be enclosed. Provide door-in-door construction as scheduled on the Drawings.

H. Panelboard widths, depths, and heights, where applicable are limited to MAXIMUM sizes shown

on schedules. Panelboards of greater width or depth and heights where applicable SHALL NOT

be acceptable.

I. ALL panelboards shall have the following modifications:

1. Panelboard fronts (including doors and trim) shall be constructed of sheet metal steel on

gauge higher than code gauge (10-gauge max.).

2. Front shall be of door-in-door construction with concealed hinges and trim

clamps.

3. Panelboard trim and box shall be painted ANSI 61 at factory.

J. Provide molded case circuit breakers of types scheduled as specified herein. Circuit breakers

shall be listed or recognized with Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. under standard Ul489, conform

to applicable requirements of NEMA Standards Publication ABI-1975 and meet the appropriate

classifications of Federal Specifications W-C-375b. Circuit breaker type, rating, and

modifications shall be as indicated on the Drawings and/or schedules.

K. This contractor shall exchange, remove, and install breakers rated 150A or less for a different

breaker rating, or similar type, number of poles and interrupting rating, when required in the job,

without cost to the Owner.

L. Provide screw cover junction boxed (S.C.J.B.) as required on contract documents and/or the NEC

for pulling requirement. S.C.J.B.'S noted for special systems shall be of the NEMA type I, surface

or flush mounting, as called for on the Drawings, minimum 16-gauge steel thickness as

manufactured by Circle A-W Products or approved equal. Boxes shall be provided with a 3/4"

thick plywood backboard sized for full area of box wall mounting surface. Furnish terminal

blocks for all wire splicing or terminations, Kulka 672 or equal in quality and construction.

Number of terminal blocks shall be as required for all wires in S.C.J.B.'s.

PART 3 - EXECUTION:

Installation of Panelboards:

A. Install panelboards and enclosures where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written

instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and the NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in

compliance with recognized practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

PANELBOARDS 262416- 4

B. Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with cable and raceway installation work.

C. Anchor enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and

mechanically secure.

D. Provide electrical connections within enclosures.

E. Provide 5" high x panelboard width x 12" depth concrete pad under each surface mounted

panelboard for protection of branch circuit conduits rising from the floor up into panelboard.

Panelboard Directories:

A. Panelboards shall have neatly typed circuit directories behind clear plastic inserted in metal frame

welded to door. Identify circuits by room numbers. Room numbers shall be those finally

selected by the Owner; not necessarily those given on the Contract Documents.

B. "Spares" and "Spaces" shall be indicated with erasable pencil, printed using legible Gothic

characters, not typed.

Panel Identification:

A. Panelboard nameplates shall be furnished by equipment manufacturer and installed at the factory.

Nameplates shall be two- or three-color laminated plastic, a minimum of 3/64" thick, so that

letters will be white on black background. Engraving shall be Roman Gothic at least 3/8" high

appropriately spaced.

B. Nameplates shall be secured to equipment with chromium plated self-tapping screws (no

adhesives, no rivets).

C. Electrical equipment to be identified includes: Distribution Panels, Panelboards, and

individually enclosed circuit breakers.

D. Panelboard must be marked to indicate where the power supply source is located. Example:

“Feeder Power Supply for Panel ‘A’ originates at Panel ‘MDP’.”

D. Nameplates on Panelboards shall give voltage characteristics, phase, number of wires, and where

panel is fed from. Example: "Panel GLA, 120/280V, 3Ph, 4W, fed from panel ‘M’.”

END OF SECTION 262416

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

WIRING DEVICES 262726- 1

SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

Related Documents:

A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section.

Description of Work:

A. The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules and by requirements of

this section. Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution systems

which are intended to carry but not utilize electric energy.

B. The types of electrical wiring devices required for project include the following:

Receptacles

Switches

Wall Plates

Plugs

Connectors

Quality Assurance:

A. Provide products produced by one of the following (for each type of wiring device):

Pass & Seymour

Hubbell Inc.

Bryant Electric Co.

Arrow-Hart, Inc.

Crouse-Hinds Co.

General Electric Co.

B. Comply with National Electrical Code (NMPA No. 70) as applicable to construction and

installation of electrical wiring devices.

C. Provide electrical wiring devices which have been tested, listed, and labeled by Underwriters

Laboratories.

UL 20 - Snap Switches

UL 498 - Plugs and Receptacles

D. Comply with National Electrical Manufacturers Association standards for general and specific

purpose wiring devices.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

WIRING DEVICES 262726- 2

Submittal:

E. Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring devices if asked for by engineer. Refer to

Section 26 05 00 for additional requirements on product data submittal.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Fabricated Devices:

A. Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices in type, color and electrical rating for the service

indicated. Where type and grade are not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by

Installer to fulfill the wiring requirements and comply with NEC and NEMA standards for wiring

devices.

Receptacles:

A. Configuration and requirements for all connector or outlet receptacles shall be in accordance with

the NEMA Publication WD1. Fire resistant, non-absorptive, hot-welded, phenolic composition or

equal bodies and based with metal plaster ears (integral with the supporting members). Single or

duplex as shown or noted on the Drawings. Ivory color unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.

Double grip contacts for each prong.

B. All receptacles shall be grounding type with a green colored hexagonal equipment ground screw

of adequate size to accommodate an insulated grounding jumper (based on Table 250-95 of the

NEC with minimum size No. 12 AWG). Ground terminals of all receptacles shall be internally

connected to the receptacle mounting yoke.

C. Duplex convenience outlets rated 20 amps, 125 volts, 2 pole, 3 wire NEMA 5-20R, back or side

wiring, shall be Hubbell #5362-I, Pass & Seymour PS5362I, or approved equal.

D. Ground fault interrupter convenience outlet (GFI) shall be rated 20A, 125V, 2-pole, 3-wire,

grounding, NEMA 5-20R, Hubbell GF20ILA, Pass & Seymour 2095I complete with stainless

steel plate, Hubbell SS26. If weatherproof use Hubbell die cast aluminum weatherproof in-use

cover model WP26E or approved equal. Weatherproof outlets shall be GFI type as specified

above, enclosed with appropriate weatherproof plate. GFI outlets must be install in a readily

accessible location as required by NEC 210.8.

E. Isolated ground convenience outlets rated 20 amps, 125 volts, 2 pole, 3 wire NEMA 5-20R, back

or side wiring, shall be Hubbell IG5352-I, or approved equal.

Special Floor Outlets:

A. Special floor outlet shall be as specified on the Drawings. If not specified on drawings floor box

shall be Legrand Wiremold EFB6 or equal with brass cover.

Switches:

A. Unless otherwise specified, each snap switch (flush tumbler-toggle) shall be of the AC general

use type fully rated 20 amperes minimum at 120/277 volts, conforming to minimum requirements

of the latest revision of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. UL 20, Fifth Edition Standard Snap

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

WIRING DEVICES 262726- 3

Switches, NEMA stds. Pub. No. WD1 and further requirements herein specified. Specification

grade, heavy duty single pole or 3-way of the maintained momentary or lock type as indicated on

the Drawings. Switches shall operate in any position and shall be fully enclosed cup type with

entire body of phenolic, urea or melamine. Fiber, paper, or similar insulating material shall not be

used for body or cover. Ivory color handles, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Silver

or silver allow contacts. AC 120/277-volt general use snap switches shall be capable of

withstanding tests as outlines in NEMA publication WD1 and shall be as follows or an Engineer

approved equal, unless otherwise noted.

B. Single pole switches shall be Hubbell HBL1221-I, Pass & Seymour PS20AC1I, Bryant #4901-I,

or approved equal.

C. Two pole switches shall be Hubbell HBL1222-I, Pass &Seymour PS20AC2I, Bryant #4902-I, or

approved equal.

D. Three-way switches shall be Hubbell HBL1223-I, Pass & Seymour PS20AC3I, Bryant #4903-I,

or approved equal in quality and function.

E. Four-way switches shall be Hubbell HBL1224-I, Pass & Seymour PS20AC4I, Bryant #4904-I, or

approved equal in quality and function.

F. Single pole key operated, switches shall be corbin-lock type, Hubbell HBL1221RKL with

SS12RKL plate, Pass & Seymour PS20AC1KL with SS717 plate, Bryant #4901RKL with

SS12RKL plate, or approved equal in quality appearance and function.

G. Three-way key operated, switches shall be corbin-lock type, Hubbell HBL1223RKL with

SS12RKL plate, Pass & Seymour PS20AC3KL with SS717 plate, Bryant #4903RKL with

SS12RKL plate, or approved equal in quality appearance and function.

H. Single pole switch with pilot light, unless otherwise noted on Drawings, shall be spec. grade, red

lighted handle, rated 20 amps, 120V, Hubbell HBL1221PL, Pass & Seymour

PS20AC1RPL(120V) PS20AC1RPL7(277V), Bryant #4901PLR120 #4901PLR277, or approved

equal in quality and function.

I. Single pole switch with green lighted handle, rated 20 amps, 120V, shall be Hubbell

HBL1221PLG, or approved equal in quality and function.

J. Weatherproof switches shall include the type of snap switch indicated on the Drawings and

specified herein, enclosed with a Crouse-Hinds #DS-181 cover and gasket mounted in an FS cast

box.

K. Thermal switches controlling or disconnecting motor loads shall be G.E., or equal in quality and

function, horsepower rated, approved for motor control service and shall be complete with

overload devices of proper ratings.

L. Where thermal switches are combined with pilot lights, on 120V, pilot light shall be Hubbell

#432 with #7298 red jewel.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

WIRING DEVICES 262726- 4

Wiring Devices Accessories:

A. Wall plates-- Provide single switch, single and duplex outlet wall plates for wiring devices, with

ganging and cutouts as indicated, provide with metal screw for securing plates to devices as noted

below, screw heads colored to match finish of plates and wall plates possessing the following

additional construction features:

Wet Locations: Receptacles in wet locations shall be installed with a hinged outlet

cover/enclosure clearly marked “Suitable for Wet Locations While in Use” and “UL Listed”.

There must be a gasket between the enclosure and the mounting surface, and between the hinged

cover and mounting plate/base to assure proper seal. Provide Taymac, Specification Grade, or

approved equal.

B. Material and Finish: Device coverplates in finished areas where conduit is concealed shall be

.035" nominal thickness, 18% chromium and 8% nickel, Sierra "S-N" line, type 302 stainless

steel or equal. Devices coverplates, where conduit is exposed, shall be galvanized steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Inspection:

A. Installer must examine areas and conditions under which wiring devices are to be installed and

notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the

work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory condition has been corrected in a

manner acceptable to the Installer.

B. It shall be the responsibility of the electrical contractor to determine from the architectural

drawings and by actual determination on the site, the exact location of each and every outlet or

switch. The outlet or switch locations shall be modified from those shown on the plans to

accommodate changes in door swings or to clear other interferences that may arise from job

construction details as well as modifications within room spaces.

C. These modifications shall be made with no change in contract price and shall be a matter of job

coordination at the expense of the electrical contractor. The Contractor shall check these

conditions throughout the entire job and shall notify the Architect/Engineer of discrepancies as

they may occur before proceeding with the installation of the work to verify the modifications, if

any.

Installation of Wiring Devices:

A. Install wiring devices where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer written instructions,

applicable requirements of NEC and National Electrical Contractor Association's "Standard of

Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products service

intended function.

B. Delay installation of devices until wiring is completed.

C. Install receptacles and switches only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from excess

building materials, debris, etc.

NMSU GENESIS-A WATER DESALINIZATION LAB

WIRING DEVICES 262726- 5

D. Adjacent switches shall be combines in one box.

E. Where switches control difference voltages (that is 120V and 277 V) place barriers in box to

provide separation.

F. Switch plates where devices are ganged shall be one piece. Switches shall be mounted 48" and

convenience outlets 18", center of box above the finished floor level except as otherwise specified

on the Drawings. Align devices and plates horizontally and vertically.

G. Wall boxes shall be set in advance of the wall construction, shall be blocked in place and secured.

All wall boxes shall be set flush with this finished building construction and the contractor shall

furnish and install extension sleeves as required to extend boxes to the finished surfaces of special

furring.

H. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with other trades the actual

installation of his outlet boxes in walls. The wall building material (cinder block, brick, sheetrock

or whatever) shall provide an even trim around outlet boxes not exceeding a 1/4" gap. The device

cover plate should be able to cover up wall openings around outlet boxes. Whenever an outlet box

installation fails to comply with the above listed condition, the electrical contractor shall arrange

to have the problem corrected.

I. Caulking, spackling material, or any other sealer used shall be kept out of the outlet box area.

J. Wiring device yokes shall be installed in physical contact with the plaster ring. Where the above

contact cannot be obtained, a green covered bonding conductor shall be installed.

K. Device cover plates for every device shall be furnished and installed by this Contractor.

Wiring Devices Identification:

A. Wiring device cover plates must be provided with a typed label attached to the plate indicating

associated panel and circuit. Example: “Panel L1 – 24”. Label must be permanent and not

removable.

Protection of Wall Plates and Receptacles:

A. Upon installation of wall plates and receptacles, advise Contractor regarding proper and cautious

use of convenience outlets. At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items which have

been damaged, including those burned and scored by faulty plugs.

Testing:

A. Test wiring devices to ensure electrical continuity of grounding connections and after energizing

circuitry, to demonstrate compliance with requirements.

END OF SECTION 262726